TWO-COLOR

SMALL OFFSET PRESS
WARNING
SAFETY COVERS HAVE BEEN INSTALLED FOR THE SAFETY OF THE OPERATOR AND PERSONS IN
THE SURROUNDING AREA. REMOVAL THEREOF MAY RESULT I N SERIOUS INJURY TO SUCH
PERSONS. ACCORDINGLY, SAFETY COVERS SHOULD NOT BE REMOVED FROM THE EQUIPMENT
NOR SHOULD SUCH EQUIPMENT BE OPERATED WITHOUT SAME.
CONTENTS
BASI C ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE L I ST
LI ST OF THE ADJUSTMENT GAUGES FOR THI S MACHINE
MAIN SECTION
1 . CYLINDER PACKING ........................................................................ 1
2 . LEVELING THE MACHINE .............................................................. .. 3
3 . THE ELECTRICAL WIRING ................................................................... 5
4 . ARRANGEMENT OF THE PI PES ................................................................ 7
5 . ADJUSTMENT OF THE PUMP BELT ............................................................. 9
....................................... 6 . THE BASE MACHINE DRIVE BELT TENSIONING ADJUSTMENT 1 0
"7 . THE ALIGNMENT OF THE PLATE CYLINDER AND THE BLANKET CYLINDER
(ON BOTH THE FI RST UNI T AND THE SECOND UNI T) ............................................ 11"
/ 8 . THE ALIGNMENT OF THE BLANKET CYLINDER AND THE IMPRESSION CYLINDER
(ON BOTH THE FI RST UNI T AND THE SECOND UNI T) ............................................ 13"
9 . THE POSITION ADJUSTMENT OF' THE CYLINDER ON CAM .......................................... 15*
1 0 . THE ADJUSTMENT OF THE CYLINDER-ON MECHANISM BETWEEN THE PLATE CYLINDER AND THE BLANKET
CYLINDER (ON BOTH THE FI RST UNI T AND THE SECOND UNI T) ................................... 17"
11 . THE ADJUSTMENT OF THE CYLINDER-OF1 MECHANISM BETWEEN THE BLANKET CYLINDER AND
.................... THE IMPRESSION CYLINDER (ON BOTH THE FI RST UNI T AND THE SECOND UNI T) 19*
...... 12 . THE CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT BETWEEN THE FI RST PLATE CYLINDER AND THE BLANKET CYLINDER 21"
13 . THE CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT BETWEEN THE SECOND PLATE CYLINDER AND THE BLANKET
CYLINDER ................................................................................ 23"
14 . THE CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT BETWEEN THE FI RST BLANKET CYLINDER AND THE IMPRESSION
CYLINDER ................................................................................ 25*
15 . THE CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT BETWEEN THE SECOND BLANKET CYLINDER AND
THE IMPRESSION CYLINDER ................................................................. 27"
16 . THE SI DE PLAY ADJUSTMENT OF THE BLANKET CYLINDER (ON BOTH THE FI RST UNI T AND
THE SECOND UNI T) ........................................................................ 29
17 . THE CYLINDER ON LINKAGE ADJUSTMENT BETWEEN THE BLANKET CYLINDER AND THE IMPRESSION
................................... CYLINDER (ON BOTH THE FI RST UNI T AND THE SECOND UNI T) 31"
1 8 . THE CYLINDER ON LINKAGE ADJUSTMENT BETWEEN THE PLATE CYLINDER AND THE BLANKET CYLINDER
(ON BOTH THE FI RST UNI T AND THE SECOND UNI T) ......................................... 33"
................................ 1 9 . THE LATERAL POSITIONING ADJUSTMENT OF THE PLATE CYLINDER 3 5
20 . THE IMPRESSION CYLINDER GRIPPER ADJUSTMENT .............................................. 37"
............ 21 . THE OPERATING LEVER POSITIONING (ON BOTH THE FI RST UNI T AND THE SECOND UNI T) 4 0
22 . THE PROXIMITY SWITCH TI MI NG ADJUSTMENT .................................................. 4 3
23 . THE CYLINDER ON SENSOR SENSI TI VI TY ADJUSTMENT ........................................... 44
. ................................................. 24 THE COUNT SENSOR SENSI TI VI TY ADJUSTMENT 4 6
25 . THE BLANKET JAM SENSOR SENSI TI VI TY ADJUSTMENT ........................................... 47'
26 . SPEED ADJUSTMENT ........................................................................ 5 0
REGISTRATION SECTION
27 . THE ALIGNMENT OF THE PAPER FEED DRUM AND THE IMPRESSION CYLINDER ........................ 52"
28 . PAPER GUIDE HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT ........................................................... 54"
29 . I N FEED ROLLER SECTION SI DE PLAY ADJUSTMENT ............................................. 55*
3 0 . THE UPPER FEED ROLLER ADJUSTMENT ........................................................ 57*
31 . THE PAPER STOP FINGER ADJUSTMENT ........................................................ 59"
The adj ustments marked wi t h (*) must be done i n an or der based on ot her adj ustments. so pl ease r ef er
t o t he basi c adj ustment procedure l i s t .
32 . THE PAPER FEED DRUM GRIPPER ADJUSTMENT .................................................. 61"
3 3 . THE PAPER FEED CAM ADJUSTMENT ........................................................... 64"
34 . THE TI MI NG PLATE SETTI NG ........................................................... 65"
3 5 . THE PAPER FEED DRUM GRIPPER CLOSING TI MI NG ADJUSTMENT ................................... 66"
3 6 . THE PAPER FEED DRUM GRIPPER OPENING TI MI NG ADJUSTMENT .................................. 68"
FEEDER SECTION
............................. . 3 7 THE CONNECTION ADJUSTMENT OF THE FEEDER TO THE BASE MACHINE
...................... 3 8 . THE POSI TI ON ADJUSTMENT OF THE SHEET SEPARATOR AND THE SI DE BLOWER
............................................................. 39 . THE SUCTION FEET ADJUSTMENT
............................................ 4 0 . THE MICRO ADJUSTMENT OF THE VACUUM VALVE CAM
4 1 . FEED LEVER SECTION LATCH ADJUSTMENT .....................................................
........................................ 4 2 . TENSION ADJUSTMENT OF THE PAPER PI L E TABLE CHAI N
............................................ 4 3 . THE PAPER PI LE TABLE GUIDE ROLLER ADJUSTMENT
44 . THE PAPER PI LE TABLE DRI VE ARM ADJUSTMENT ...............................................
4 5 . ADJUSTMENT OF THE DOUBLE SHEET DETECTOR .................................................
................................................................... 4 6 . PUSH GUIDE ADJUSTMENT
DELIVERY SECTION
.......................................................... . 4 7 CD CHAI N TENSIONING ADJUSTMENT
................................................................... . 4 8 CD GRIPPER ADJUSTMENT
................. . 4 9 TRANSFER POSI TI ON ADJUSTMENT BETWEEN THE IMPRESSION CYLINDER AND THE CD
............................................ 5 0 . ADJUSTMENT OF THE CD GRIPPERS CLOSING TI MI NG
51 . ADJUSTMENT OF THE CD JOGGER GUIDE TI MI NG ................................................
............................................ 52 . DELI VERY TABLE DOLLY GUIDE ROLLER ADJUSTMENT
............................. 5 3 . THE SENSI TI VI TY ADJUSTMENT OF THE DELI VERY DETECTION SENSOR
............................... 54 . ADJUSTMENT OF THE DELI VERY TABLE DOLLY LOWER L I MI T SWITCH
................................................... . 5 5 ADJUSTMENT OF THE DELI VERY JAM SWITCH
I NK. WATER SECTION
...................................................... . 5 6 ADJUSTMENT OF THE ROLLERS PRESSURE
.......................................... . 57 THE PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT OF THE I NK FORM ROLLER
................................... . 5 8 THE PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT OF THE I NK DI STRI BUTOR ROLLER
..................................................... 5 9 . ADJUSTMENT OF THE I NK DUCTOR ROLLER
......... 6 0 . THE TI MI NG ADJUSTMENT BETWEEN THE I NK FOUNTAIN ROLLER AND THE I NK DUCTOR ROLLER
............................................. . 61 ADJUSTMENT OF THE I NK DUCTOR STOP MECHANISM
... 6 2 . ADJUSTMENT OF THE FORM ROLLER SHAFT SNAPPER (BOTH THE I NK AND THE WATER FORM ROLLERS)
... 6 3 . THE SI DE PLAY ADJUSTMENT OF THE FORM ROLLER (BOTH THE I NK AND THE WATER FORM ROLLERS)
........................................ . 64 M E PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT OF THE WATER FORM ROLLER
........................................... 6 5 . ADJUSTMENT OF THE WATER DUCTOR STOP MECHANISM
...................................... 6 6 . THE PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT OF THE WATER DUCTOR ROLLER
.................................. 6 7 . THE WATER FOUNTAIN ROLLER FEEDING MECHANISM ADJUSTMENT
.............................................................. 6 8 . THE PLATE CLAMP ADJUSTMENT
............................................... 6 9 . ADJUSTMENT OF THE BLANKET CLEANING DEVI CE
.................................................................. TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
....................................................................... MAINTENANCE CHECKLIST
The adj ustments marked wi t h (*) must be done i n an or der based on ot her adj ustments. so pl ease r ef er
t o t he basi c adj ustment procedure l i s t .
BASIC ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE LIST
/ 3 /
1 3. The e l e c t r i c a l wi r i ng
Order
1
1 4 1
14. Arrangement o f t he pi pes
I
1 7 1
5 1
1 5. Adjustment o f t he pump b e l t
Adjustment I Page
1. Cyl i nder packi ng
i (on bot h t he f i r s t u n i t and t he second u n i t ) 1
1
3 2
/ 6. The base machine d r i v e b e l t t ensi oni ng adj ustment
--C
1 1 7. The al i gnment o f t he pl at e cyl i nder and t he bl anket cyl i nder
2 1 8. The al i gnment o f t he bl anket cyl i nder and t he i mpressi on cyl i nder
/ 2. Level i ngt hemachi ne
10
11
I / ( o n b o t h t h e f i r s t u n i t a n d t h e s e c o n d u n i t ) 1 1
1 1 9. The posi t i on adj ustment o f t he cyl i nder - on cam
10. The adj ustment o f t he cyl i nder - on mechanism between t he pl at e cyl i nder and
I
LY linder I
2 113. The cl earance adj ustment between t he second pl at e cyl i nder and t he bl anket
I I 23
I
I t he bl anket cyl i nder (on bot h t he f i r s t u n i t and t he second u n i t )
3 i l l . The adj ustment of t he cyl i nder - on mechanism between t he bl anket cyl i nder and
1
t he i mpressi on cyl i nder (on bot h t he f i r s t u n i t and t he second u n i t )
1 / 12. The cl earance adj ustment between t he f i r s t pl at e cyl i nder and t he bl anket
I
19
2 1
cyl i nder
cl earance adj ustment between t he f i r s t bl anket cyl i nder and t he
I / i mpressi on cyl i nder 1 I
25
i mpressi on cyl i nder
cl earance adj ustment between t he second bl anket cyl i nder and t he
116. The si de pl ay adj ustment o f t he bl anket cyl i nder (on bot h t he f i r s t u n i t and 1
27
/ 1 i mpressi on cyl i nder (on bot h t he f i r s t u n i t and t he second u n i t ) I
1
t he second u n i t )
17. The cyl i nder on l i nkage adj ustment between t he bl anket cyl i nder and t he
I
112 ( (19. The l a t e r a l posi t i oni ng adj ustment o f t he pl at e cyl i nder 1 35 1
2 18. The cyl i nder on l i nkage adj ustment between t he pl at e cyl i nder and t he bl anket
cyl i nder (on bot h t he f i r s t u n i t and t he second u n i t )
13 21. The oper at i ng l ever posi t i oni ng (on bot h t he f i r s t u n i t and t he second u n i t ) 40
I / or der 1 Adjustment I Page 1
1 1 1 128. Paper gui de hei ght adj ustment
12 131. The paper st op f i nger adj ustment
-- -- - -- - -- --
I
29. I n feed r o l l e r sect i on si de pl ay adj ustment
--
feed r o l l e r adj ustment 57
2 3 1 . The paper st op f i nger adj ustment
: :
- - . -- -. . . - - -.
33. The paper feed cam adj ustment
E-
5 l l / 32. The paper feed drum gr i pper adj ustment
2 35. The paper feed drum gr i pper cl osi ng t i mi ng adj ustment
---
I
3 , 20. The i mpressi on cyl i nder gr i pper adj ustment
I+- 37
/ 4 / 27. The al i gnment o f t he paper feed drum and t he i mpressi on cyl i nder
j 52
15 136. The paper feed drum gr i pper opening t i mi ng adj ustment
1 68
/ 6 1 47. CD chai n t ensi oni ng adj ustment
1 7 / 48. CD gr i pper adj ustment 1 89
18 149. Transf er posi t i on adj ustment between t he i mpressi on cyl i nder and t he CD
1 91
/ 9 150. Adjustment o f t he CD gr i pper s c l o s i n g t i mi n g
10 134. The t i mi ng pl at e s et t i ng 1 65
I --
~~~~~
/11 122. The pr oxi mi t y swi t ch t i mi ng adj ustment
1 8 / 153. The s e n s i t i v i t y adj ustment o f t he del i ver y det ect i on sensor 1 96 1
6
7
54. Adjustment o f t he del i ver y t abl e d o l l y l ower l i m i t swi t ch
t he del i ver y jam swi t ch
151. Adjustment o f t he CD j ogger gui de t i mi ng
52. Del i ver y t abl e d o l l y gui de r o l l e r adj ustment
1 1 37. The connect i on adj ustment o f t he feeder t o t he base machine
2 46. Push gui de adj ustment
1 6 1 1 44. The paper p i l e t abl e dr i v e arm adj ustment 1 82 1
c
0
.rl
w
a,
cn
a,
u
a,
a, LL
2
3
4
.~
5
7
1
2
3
45. Adjustment o f t he doubl e sheet det ect or 84
1
39. The suct i on f eet adj ustment 1 74
41. Feed l ever sect i on l at c h adj ustment 78
.40. The mi cro adj ust ment o f t he vacuum val ve cam ! 76
38. The posi t i on adj ustment o f t he sheet separat or and t he si de bl ower
42. Tension adj ustment o f t he paper p i l e t abl e chai n
73
80
43. The paper p i l e t abl e gui de r o l l e r adj ustment 1 81
c
0
.A
C,
U
Adjustment
56. Adjustment o f t he r o l l e r s pressure
- --
i 57. The pressure adj ustment of t he i nk form r o l l e r
58. The pressure adj ustment o f t he i nk d i s t r i b u t o r r o l l e r
59. Adjustment o f t he i nk duct or r o l l e r
-
61. Adjustment o f t he i nk duct or st op mechanism
60. The t i mi ng adj ustment between t he i nk f ount ai n r o l l e r and t he i nk duct or
r o l l e r
62. Adjustment o f t he form rol ' l er shaf t snapper ( bot h t he i nk and t he water
form r o l l e r s )
63. The si de pl ay adj ustment o f t he form r o l l e r ( bot h t he i nk and t he water
form r o l l e r s
164. The pressure adj ustment o f t he water form r o l l e r
I
m
3
Y
C
U
Page
99
101
1 04
106
110
108
112
113
114
Order
' 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
118
116
120
9
/
, I 0
121
21
23
25
27
123
44
46
4 7
50
j 11
68. The pl at e clamp adj ustment
12. The cl earance adj ustment between t he f i r s t pl at e cyl i nder and t he bl anket
1 6 6 . The pressure adj ustment o f t he water duct or r o l l e r
2 65. Adjustment o f t he water duct or st op mechanism
67. The water f ount ai n r o l l e r f eedi ng mechanism adj ustment
1 1 cyl i nder
j / -
' 13. The cl earance adj ustment between t he second pl at e cyl i nder and t he bl anket
1 1 ;
1 , i cyl i nder
'
1 14. The cl earance adj ustment between t he f i r s t bl anket cyl i nder and t he
I /
! i mpressi on cyl i nder
! I - - -
/ 15. The cl earance adj ustment between t he second bl anket cyl i nder and t he
i
/ i mpressi on cyl i nder
!
2 , 69. Adjustment o f t he bl anket cl eani ng devi ce
23. The cyl i nder on sensor s e n s i t i v i t y adj ustment
24. The count sensor s e n s i t i v i t y adj ustment
25. The bl anket jam sensor s e n s i t i v i t y adj ustment
26. Speed adj ustment
I
1
i
I
I
1
m
U
..+c
1 0
C, ..+
U4-
cuu
-+a,
wf f l
I
2
3
4
* L i s t o f t he adj ustment gauges f or t h i s machine
Q' t y Reference pages Order number
(1 ) 5340 J 001
Name
- --- -
Thickness gauge f o r t he cl earance adj ust -
/
P. 22, P. 24
ment between t he pl at e cyl i nder and t he I
bl anket cyl i nder
I
( 2) 5340 J 002
( 3 ) 5340 J 003
I
Thickness gauge f or t he cl earance adj ust - 1 P. 26, P. 28
ment between t he bl anket cyl i nder and t he
i mpressi on cyl i nder 1 I
Adjustment gauge o f t he paper feed drum
I
I
1 1 P. 62
1. CYLINDER PACKING
For t he cyl i nder packi ng, t he t r ue- r ol l i ng method i s used. Thi s method produces an excel l ent
ef f ec t i n r eal i zi ng t he image di mensi on i n t he ci r cumf er ent i al di r ec t i on of t he pl at e accur at el y
on t he sheets o f paper.
(The Pl at e Cyl i nder Packing I l l u s t r a t i o n )
Pl at e
Pl at e cyl i nder Pl at e cyl i nder 3
standard packi ng -
- Pi t c h
r-
, .
di ameter .- +
d iame
* Uni t = mm
c i r c l e
t e r
The pl at e cyl i nder st andard packi ng ( a) = 0.13
( Wi t h t he pl at e pressure d i a l scal e on t he 0.13 posi t i on)
* I t i s possi bl e t o change t he pl at e cyl i nder packi ng di ameter from 0.1 t o 0.3mm.
(The Bl anket Cyl i nder Packing I l l u s t r a t i o n )
Bl anket
Bl anket cyl i nder
b = 2.50
The bl anket cyl i nder standard packi ng ( b ) = 2.50
F i r s t u n i t
pl at e cyl i nder
Second u n i t
pl at e cyl i nder
F i r s t u n i t
bl anket c y l
Second u n i t
bl anket c y l i nder -
." ).
i nder
I mpressi on cyl i nder
P = F i r s t pl at e cyl i nder packi ng di ameter = Second pl at e cyl i nder packi ng di ameter = 171.42
Q = F i r s t bl anket cyl i nder packi ng di ameter = Second bl anket cyl i nder packi ng di ameter = 170.98
C = Impressi on cyl i nder di ameter = 342.8
XI= 170.97
Xz= 256.74
a = Pl at e cyl i nder standard packi ng = 0.13 ( I t i s possi bl e t o change i t from 0.1 t o 0.3.)
b = Bl anket cyl i nder st andard packi ng = 2.50
x i = Clearance between t he f i r s t pl at e cyl i nder and t he bl anket cyl i nder = Cl earance between t he
second pl at e cyl i nder and t he bl anket cyl i nder = 2.53 ( Wi t h t he i mpressi on pr essur e d i a l scal e
a t t he 0.13 posi t i on)
xi'= Cl earance between t he f i r s t bl anket cyl i nder and t he i mpressi on cyl i nder = Cl earance between t he
second bl anket cyl i nder and t he second i mpressi on cyl i nder = 2.35 ( Wi t h t he i mpressi on pressure
d i a l scal e on t he 0 posi t i on)
y l = Pl at e pressure = 0.10
y2= Impressi on pressure = 0.15
2. LEVELING THE MACHINE
1 ) Purpose
Per f ect l evel i ng o f t he machine can prevent unnecessary wear and damage and w i l l al so prevent
var i ous p r i n t i n g t r oubl es due t o f a u l t y i n s t a l l a t i o n o f t he machine.
2) Poi nt
The l ev el accuracy i n bot h t he v e r t i c a l and t he l a t e r a l di r ec t i on shoul d be wi t hi n 0.05mm per
meter.
3 ) Measuring poi nt s f or l ev el accuracy
Use a l ev el wi t h an accuracy o f wi t hi n 0.02mm per meter.
Level t he machine a t t he f ol l owi ng t hr ee poi nt s.
1. On t he pl at e cyl i nder ( 1 ) 2. Operat i on si de base machine 3. Non oper at i on si de base
(The second u n i t ) frame ( 2) machine frame ( 2 )
(Except on t he c ut t i ng par t
(*I o f t he frame)
(Note)
The sur f ace where t he l e v e l i s t o be posi t i oned must be f r ee o f a l l o i l and f or ei gn par t i cl es.
4 ) Adjustment
A B
1. Adj ust t he l ev el of t he
machine by usi ng t he f our
adj ustment bol t s " A" ano "B".
f i x t he feeder sect i on by
usi ng t he two " C" bol t s.
(2) Nut
(1) Bol t
Base
3. Af t er t he adj ustment i s
f i ni shed, f i x t he b o l t ( 1 )
by usi ng t he nut (2).
(Note)
1 . The cl earance between t he channel pl at e and t he base shoul d be l ess than 10mm t o secure
s u f f i c i e n t st r engt h of t he bol t s.
Channel p l a t e
c
C I r on pl at e
I f a cl earance wi t hi n l Omm cannot be
secured, an i r o n pl at e shoul d be pl aced
under t he base.
2. When f i x i n g t he feeder sect i on usi ng t he two b o l t s " C" , j u s t cont act t he b o l t s "C" t o t he
f l oor so t hat t he l e v e l adj ust ed usi ng t he b o l t s " A" and "B" does not change.
3. THE ELECTRICAL WIRING
1 ) Power sour ce
f===l
Tr ansf or mer
Thi s machine power sources a r e
Si ngl e phase 200V. 208V. 220V
Three phase 200V
I f a power sour ce i s used t h a t i s not on
t he l i s t above, use a t r ansf or mer and set
t he vol t age val ue t o t he one shown on t he
machi ne i d e n t i f i c a t i o n pl at e.
Set t he vol t age by
changi ng t he t a p a t
t he out put s i de o f
t he t r ansf or mer .
2) The sub cont r ol box a t t he t er mi nal base
T B 1
- - - - - - - -
I
: Gray Yel l ow Bl ack f Whi t e Brown Orange Bl ue
Si ngl e phase and t hr ee phase ar e t he bl ack l i nes.
Si ngl e phase 208V i s t he yel l ow l i ne.
Si ngl e phase 220V i s t he gray l i n e and shoul d be connected t o R on t he TB1, and ot her l i nes
t hat ar e not used shoul d be pr oper l y i nsul at ed.
3 ) Checking t he power source phase (Three phase machine)
The base machine motor w i l l always r ot at e nor mal l y because an i nver t er i s used. To check t he
power source phase, check t he pump motor r ot at i on di r ect i on.
I f t he pump r ot at es back-
wards, swi t ch any two o f
t he wi r es R, S, T.
4. ARRANGEMENT OF THE PIPES
Paper feed suct i on f eet
CD a i r bl ower
Blower cont r ol knob
I
Arrangement o f t he pi pes
~ b r i c a t i o n Mechanism)
Vent i l at i on openi ng O i l cup
Pump
Posi t i on t he wi ck t i p so t hat i t i s l ocat ed 2 t o
3mm away from t he nozzl e. ( I f t he wick t i p i s
compl et el y i n cont act wi t h t he nozzl e or i f i t
i s l ocat ed behi nd t he v ent i l at i on opening t he
pump w i l l not be l ubr i cat ed and i t may sei ze. )
Bo t t l e
(Note)
1 ) Cl eani ng t he f i l t e r 2) Suppl yi ng o i l i n t he o i l cup
1. Clean t he f i l t e r ( 1 ) once 2. Per i odi cal l y suppl y o i l i n t o
a month. t he o i l cup t o keep t he b o t t l e
( 2) f i l l e d wi t h o i l a t a l l
ti mes.
When suppl yi ng o i l i n t o t he o i l cup, use t he speci al pump o i l shipped t oget her wi t h t he machine o r
t he equi val ent o i l . (The t abl e of recommended pump o i l and grease i s l i s t e d i n t he oper at i on
manual.)
3) Cl eani ng t he pump
Clean t he pump f ol l owi ng t he procedures one through f our when t he vacuum f or ce and t he f or ce of
t he blower ar e reduced o r when t he machine i s i nst al l ed.
1. Remove t he f i l t e r . 2. Push t he pump but t on . 3. Pour i n a cl eani ng mi xt ur e o f
cl eani ng sol ut i on (70%) and
pump o i l ( 30%) from t he vacuum
si de.
When pouri ng t he cl eani ng mi xt ur e i n from t he vacuum si de,
remove t he ot her f i l t e r and c ol l ec t t he di scharged
cl eani ng mi xt ur e wi t h rags t o check t he cl eani ng condi t i on
a t t he exhaust si de.
4. To evaporate t he cl eani ng
sol ut i on i nsi de compl et el y,
run t he pump under no l oad
f or two t o t hr ee mi nutes
a f t e r t he pump i s cl eaned
and mount t he f i l t e r .
5. ADJUSTMENT OF THE PUMP BELT
1 ) Purpose
Pr oper l y r ensi oni ng t he pump b e l t eliminates unnecessary wear of and/ or damage t o t he b e l t and can
pr event excessi ve power t r ansmi ssi on l oss.
V- bel t p u l l e y
V- bel t p u l l e y
(1) Bo l t
Pump b e l t
( Conf i r mat i on)
When pushi ng down on t he c e n t r a l par t o f t he V- bel t by hand ( wi t h a f or c e o f about l k g ) , t her e
shoul d be a pl ay i n t he b e l t o f about 6mm.
2 ) Adj ustment
1. Loosen t he f our b o l t s ( 1 )
and move t he motor t o
pr oper l y t ensi on t he b e l t .
(Ref erence)
Use t he c or r ec t V- bel t p u l l e y and V- bel t accor di ng t o t he power f requency.
Pul l ey Si ngl e phase 50Hz - 5340 16 113
Si ngl e phase 60Hz - 5330 16 112
3 phase 50Hz - 5340 16 111
3 phase 60Hz - 5340 16 112
V- Bel t Si ngl e phase. 3 phase 50Hz - A-36" 90102
Si ngl e phase, 3 phase 60Hz - A-35" 90101
6. THE BASE MACHINE DRI VE BELT TENSIONING ADJUSTMENT
1 ) Purpose
To pr oper l y t ensi on t he V- bel t
2) Poi nt
( Conf i r mat i on)
When pushi ng t he cent r al par t o f t he
V- bel t ( Wi t h a f or ce of about 2kg),
t her e shoul d be a pl ay o f 9mm.
(Note)
(Adj ust ment )
Loosen t he two b o l t s 1 1 ) and move t he
t ensi oni ng pul l ey ( 2) t o adj ust it.
When t he t ensi on o f t he V- bel t i s weak, t he
machine cannot be run cor r ect l y.
There ar e f our b o l t hol es f or f i x i n g t he pul l ey.
So when t he proper t ensi on cannot be assured by
onl y s hi f t i ng. t he posi t i on o f t he two b o l t s ( 1 )
shoul d be changed.
7. THE ALIGNMENT OF THE PLATE CYLINDER AND THE BLANKET CYLINDER
(ON BOTH THE FIRST UNIT AND THE SECOND UNIT)
1 ) Purpose
By doi ng t he al i gnment o f t he p l a t e cyl i nder and t he bl anket cyl i nder , t he maximum p r i n t i n g area
of 330 x 438mm i s assured.
2) Poi nt
I
Pl at e cyl i nder I
Bl anket . cyl i nder / L
I
( 4 mm)
i
Leading edge
( Conf i r mat i on)
The posi t i on r el at i onshi p between
t he p l a t e cyl i nder and t he bl anket
' cyl i nder .
(Adj ust ment )
Loosen t he t hr ee pl at e cyl i nder gear
b o l t s 11) and t ur n t he pl at e cyl i nder
f i r
3 ) Adj ustment
Pl a t e c y l i n d e r ,
Leadi ng edge . ( .$ i nrn)
1. Pack t he p l a t e c y l i n d e r and 2. Suppl y i nk on t o t he pl at e. 3. Rot at e t he c y l ~ n d e r once wl t h
t he bl anket c y l i nder t o t he c y l i n d e r s ON and measure
t h e i r st andard t hi ckness. t he l engt h (A) o f t he p l a t e
whi ch does not t r ans f er i nk
t o t he bl anket c y l i n d e r .
4. Loosen t he t hr ee p l a t e 5. Tur n t he p l a t e c y l i n d e r so 6. Ti ght en t h e t hr ee f i x i n g
c y l i n d e r gear f i x i n g b o l t s ( 1 ) . t h a t t he l engt h ( A) i s 4mm. b o l t s ( 1 ) .
8. THE ALIGNMENT OF THE BLANKET CYLINDER AND THE IMPRESSION CYLINDER
(ON BOTH THE FIRST UNIT AND THE SECOND UNIT)
1 ) Purpose
When t he v e r t i c a l adj ustment scal e i s set on (01, t he maximum p r i n t i n g area o f 330 x 438mm and
t he standard gr i pper margi n of 8mm w i l l be assured.
2) Poi nt
Leading edge I
( Conf i r mat i on)
Check t he gr i pper margi n and t he
maximum pr i nt i ng area by doi ng
maximum s o l i d pr i nt i ng.
scal e pl at e /
~ i x i n ~ b o l t
(Adj ust ment )
Af t er adj ust i ng t he v e r t i c a l image posi -
t i oni ng adj ustment d i a l , a l i g n t he scal e
pl at e on ( 0) .
3 ) Adjustment
0 ) Posi t i on
1. Set t he scal e pl at e t ( 0) posi t i on. 2. The pl at e cyl i nder and t he
bl anket cyl i nder must be
packed t o t h e i r st andard
t hi ckness.
3. Do t he maximum s ol i d pr i nt i ng. 4, Move t he v e r t i c a l adj ustment
5. Loosen t he bol t s and al i gn
d i a l t o adj ust t he gr i pper
t he scal e pl at e on t he ( 0)
margi n so i t i s st andard and posi t i on and f i x i t .
so t he maximum pr i nt i ng area
i s assured.
9. THE POSITION ADJUSTMENT OF THE CYLINDER ON CAM
1 ) Purpose
The cylinder ON of the blanket cylinder, the plate cylinder, and the impression cylinder should be
done consistently at the correct position.
2) Point
Plate cylinder
/ Blanket cylinder
Blanket cylinder
(Confirmation 1 )
The plate cylinder and the blanket
cylinder should go ON at the posi-
tion where the plate cylinder notch
and the blanket cylinder notch are
facing each other.
-ession cylinder
(Confirmation 2)
The blanket cylinder and the impression
cylinder should go ON at the position
where the blanket cylinder notch at the
impression cylinder notch are facing each
other.
Positioning hole
Second unit plate cylinder
- blanket cylinder cylinder ON cam
First unit plate cylinder
- blanket cylinder cylinder ON cam
First unit and second unit blanket
cylinder - impression cylinder
cylinder ON cam
(Adjustment)
When the timing plate is on oO. the frame positioning hole and the three plate cam positioning
hole should be aligned. (At the 6 o'clock position)
3 Adjustment
1 . Set t he t i mi ng pl at e on t he 2. Loosen t he two cam f i x i n g 3. Al i gn t he frame posi t i oni ng
O0 posi t i on. bol t s ( 1 ) . hol e and t he t hr ee pl at e cam
posi t i oni ng hol e usi ng a 4mm
a l l e n wrench.
( a t t he 6 o' cl ock posi t i on)
4. Fi x t he two bol t s ( 1 ) .
10. THE ADJUSTMENT OF M E CYLINDER ON MECHANISM BETWEEN M E PLATE CYLINDER AND M E BLANKET CYLINDER
(ON BOTH THE FIRST UNIT AND THE SECOND UNIT)
1 ) Purpose
The c y l i n d e r ON between t h e p l a t e c y l i n d e r and t he bl anket c y l i n d e r shoul d go c o n s i s t e n t l y ON and
OFF smoot hl y by t he c y l i n d e r ON and OFF s i g n a l wh i l e t he machi ne i s r unni ng.
2) Poi nt
( Conf i r mat i on)
When s e t t i n g t h e cam f o l l o we r ( 1 )
a t t he hi gh p o s i t i o n o f t h e cam ( 2 )
wi t h t he t h r u s t e r (5) ON, t her e
shoul d be a O. l mm cl ear ance between
t h e cam f ol l ower ( 1 ) and t h e cam ( 2) .
( Adj ust ment )
Adj ust by t u r n i n g t he e c c e n t r i c p i n ( 4 ) .
3) Adjustment
1 . Turn t he handwheel and set
t he cam f ol l ower ( 1 ) a t
t he low posi t i on o f t he cam
( 2) .
4. Turn t he handwheel whi l e
pushi ng t he t hr ust er by hand
and set t he cam f ol l ower ( 1)
on t he hi gh posi t i on o f t he
cam ( 2) .
7. Loosen t he b o l t ( 7 ) and
r el ease t he OFF si de st opper
( 8) .
&@
2. Set t he cyl i nder arm ( 3) a t 3. Loosening t he eccent r i c pi n
t he ON si de by hand. ( 4 ) . posi t i on t he t hr ust er
( 5) so i t i s f u l l y toward t he
cam ( 2) si de.
5. I ns er t a O. l mm t hi ckness 6. Adj ust t he eccent r i c p i n ( 4)
gauge between t he cam so t hat t he t hr ust er ( 5 ) i s
f ol l ower ( 1) and t he cam ( 2) . l i g h t l y i n cont act wi t h t he
pi n ( 6 ) a t t he ON si de.
8. Turn t he handwheel and set 9. Turn t he OFF si de st opper ( 8)
i t a t t he pos i t i on where t he t o adj ust t he cl earance t o
t hr ust er ( 5) pushes out t he 0.5mm.
p i n (9) on t he OFF si de.
(Not e)
Set t he eccent r i c p i n ( 4 ) so t hat t he cl earance between
t he t hr ust er and t he p i n becomes narrower when t ur ni ng i t
i n t he cl ockwi se di r ec t i on on bot h t he f i r s t u n i t and t he
second uni t .
11. THE ADJUSTMENT OF THE CYLINDER ON MECHANISM t3ETWEEE.I THE BLANKET CYLINDER AND
THE IMPRESSION CYLINDER (ON BOTH THE FIRST UNIT AND THE SECOND UNIT)
1 ) Purpose
The c y l i n d e r ON between t he bl anket c y l i n d e r and t h e i mpr essi on c y l l n d e r shoul d go c o n s i s t e n t l y ON
and OFF smoot hl y by t h e c y l i n d e r ON and OFF s i g n a l wh i l e t he machlne i s runni ng.
2) Po i n t
(2)
( Conf i r mat i on)
When s e t t i n g t h e cam f ol l ower ( 1 ) a t
t he hi gh p o s i t i o n o f t h e cam ( 2 )
wi t h t h e t h r u s t e r ( 5) ON, t her e
shoul d be a 0.1 mm cl ear ance between
t h e cam f o l l o we r ( 1) and t h e cam ( 2) .
( Adj ust ment )
Adj ust by t u r n i n g t he ec c ent r i c p i n ( 4 ) .
3) Adjustment
1. Turn t he handwheel and set
t he cam f ol l ower ( 1) at t he
low posi t i on o f t he cam ( 2) .
2. Set t he cyl i nder ON arm ( 3 )
a t t he ON si de by hand.
3. Loosen t he eccent r i c pi n ( 4)
and set i t at t he posi t i on
where t he t hr ust er ( 5) i s
f u l l y pushed t o t he cam (2)
4. Turn t he handwheel whi l e
pushi ng' t he t hr ust er by
hand and set t he cam
f ol l ower ( 1 on t he hi gh
7. Loosen t he b o l t ( 7) and
rel ease t he OFF si de st opper
( 8) .
(Note)
5. I ns er t a O. l mm t hi ckness
gauge between t he cam
f oi l ower ( 1) and t he cam ( 2) .
6. Adj ust t he eccent r i c pi n ( 4)
so t hat t he t hr ust er ( 5) i s
l i g h t l y i n cont act wi t h t he
pi n ( 6 ) a t t he ON si de.
8. Turn t he handwheel and st op
i t a t t he posi t i on where t he
t hr ust er ( 5) pushes out t he
p i n ( 9 ) on t he OFF si de. .
9. Turn t he OFF si de st opper ( 8)
t o adj ust t he cl ear ance t o
0.5mm.
Set t he eccent r i c p i n ( 4) so t hat t he cl earance between
t he t hr ust er and t he p i n i s reduced when t ur ni ng i t i n t he
cl ockwi se di r ec t i on on bot h t he f i r s t u n i t and t he second
uni t .
12. THE CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT BETWEEN THE FIRST PLATE CYLINDER AND M E BLANKET CYLINDER
1 ) Purpose
The cl earance between t he f i r s t bare pl at e cyl i nder and t he f i r s t bare bl anket cyl i ' nder shoul d be
2.53mm wi t h t he cyl i nder s ON.
2) Poi nt
Pl at e pressure
d i a l
( Conf i r mat i on)
* Wi t h t he bl anket cyl i nder and t he pl at e cyl i nder ON and t he pl at e pressure d i a l on 0.13,
* Wi t h t he bl anket cyl i nder and t he i mpressi on cyl i nder ON and t he i mpressi on pressure d i a l i s
on 0 ,
t he cl earance between t he pl at e cyl i nder and t he bl anket cyl i nder shoul d be 2.53mm.
( Par al l el Pressure Adj ustment)
Loosen t he l ock nut ( 2 ) and adj ust
by t ur ni ng t he eccent r i c b o l t ( 3) .
( Tot al Pressure Adj ustment)
Loosen t he l ock nut ( 4 ) and adj ust by t ur n-
i ng t he adj ustment b o l t ( 5) .
3 Adjustment
Pl at e cyl i nde
1. Turn t he handwheel whi l e 2. Posi t i on t he pl at e cyl i nder 3. Set t he i mpressi on pressure
pushi ng t he sol enoi d ( 1 ) i n and t he bl anket cyl i nder so d i a l t o 0 ( t he poi nt where
by hand and set t he bl anket t hat t he notches ar e shown i n t he d i a l i s f u l l y t urned i n
cyl i nder and t he pl at e t he i l l u s t r a t i o n above. t he count er cl ockwi se di r ec-
cyl i nder , and t he bl anket (Ti mi ng pl at e 180°) t i on. ) .
cyl i nder and t he i mpressi on
cyl i nder ON.
, 4. Set t he pl at e pressure d i a l 5.
t o 0.13.
I ns er t a 2.53mm t hi ckness 6, Loosen t he l ock nut ( 2 ) and
gauge between t he pl at e adj ust t he p a r a l l e l pressure
cyl i nder and t he bl anket by t ur ni ng t he eccent r i c b o l t
cyl i nder t o check t he cl ear - ( 3 ) . (When t ur ni ng i t i n t he
ance. (On bot h t he oper at i on cl ockwi se di r ect i on, t he
si de and t he non oper at i on cl earance w i l l be reduced.)
si de)
* When adj ust i ng t he t o t a l pressure, set t he pl at e cyl i nder
and t he bl anket cyl i nder ON and OFF t o check t he
cl earance.
7. Loosen t he l ock nut ( 4) and
adj ust t he t o t a l pressure by
t ur ni ng t he adj ustment b o l t
( 5 ) . (When t i ght eni ng i t ,
t he cl earance w i l l be
reduced. )
(Note)
Af t er t he cl earance adj ustment between t he pl at e cyl i nder and t he bl anket cyl i nder i s done, t he
cl earance adj ustment between t he bl anket cyl i nder and t he i mpressi on cyl i nder has t o be done.
13. THE CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT BETWEEN THE SECOND UNIT PLATE CYLINDER AND THE BLANKET CYLINDER
1 ) Purpose
The cl earance between t he second bare pl at e cyl i nder and t he second bare bl anket cyl i nder shoul d
be 2.53mm wi t h t he cyl i nder s ON.
2) Poi nt
Pl at e cyl i nder
Pl at e pressure d i a l
( Conf i r mat i on)
* Wi t h t he bl anket cyl i nder and t he pl at e cyl i nder ON and t he pl at e pressure d i a l set on
0.13,
* Wi t h t he bl anket cyl i nder and t he i mpressi on cyl i nder ON and t he i mpressi on pressure d i a l
set on 0 ,
t he cl earance between t he pl at e cyl i nder and t he bl anket cyl i nder shoul d be 2.53mm.
( Par al l el Pressure Adj ustment)
Loosen t he l ock nut ( 2) and adj ust
by t ur ni ng t he eccent r i c b o l t ( 3) .
( Tot al Pressure Adj ustment)
Loosen t he l ock nut ( 4) and adj ust by
t ur ni ng t he adj ustment b o l t ( 5 ) .
3) Adjustment
Pl at e cyl i nder
1. Turn t he handwheel whi l e 2. Posi t i on t he pl at e cyl i nder 3. Set t he i mpressi on pressure
pushi ng t he sol enoi d ( 1 ) i n and t he bl anket cyl i nder so d i a l t o 0 ( t h e poi nt where t he
by hand and set t he bl anket t hat t he notches ar e shown i n d i a l i s f u l l y t urned i n t he
cyl i nder and t he pl at e t he i l l u s t r a t i o n above. count er cl ockwi se di r ect i on. ) .
cyl i nder , and t he bl anket (Ti mi ng pl at e 1 8 0 ~ )
cyl i nder and t he i mpressi on
cyl i nder ON.
4. Set t he pl at e pressure d i a l 5. I nser t a 2.53mm t hi ckness 6. Loosen t he l ock nut ( 2 ) and
gauge between t he pl at e adj ust t he p a r a l l e l pressure
cyl i nder and t he bl anket by t ur ni ng t he eccent r i c b o l t
cyl i nder t o check t he cl ear - ( 3) . (When t ur ni ng i t i n t he
ance. (On bot h t he oper at i on cl ockwi se di r ect i on, t he
si de and t he non operat i on cl ear ance w i l l be reduced.)
si de)
3
* When adj ust i ng t he t o t a l pressu
and t he bl anket cyl i nder ON and
cl earance.
adj ust t he t o t a l pressure by
t ur ni ng t he adj ustment b o l t
( 5 ) . (When t i ght eni ng i t ,
t he cl earance w i l l be
reduced. )
t e)
Af t er t he cl earance adj ustment between t he p l a t e cyl i nder and t he bl anket cyl i nder i s done, t he
cl earance adj ustment between t he bl anket cyl i nder and t he i mpressi on cyl i nder has t o be done.
15. THE CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT BETWEEN THE SECOND UNIT BARE BLANKET CYLINDER AND THE BARE IMPRESSION
CYLINDER
1 ) Purpose
The cl ear ance bet he second u n i t bar e bl anket c y l i n d e r and t h e bar e i mpr essi on c y l i n d e r
shoul d be 2.35mm
2) Po i n t
I mpr essi on c y l i n d e r
der and t he p l a t e c y l i n d e r ON and t he p l a t e pr essur e d i a l on 0.13,
* Wi t h t h e bl anket c y l i n d e r and t he i mpr essi on c y l i n d e r ON and t he i mpr essi on pr essur e d i a l on
0 ,
t he cl ear ance between t he bl ank et c y l i n d e r and t h e i mpr essi on c y l i n d e r shoul d be 2.35mm.
( P a r a l l e l Pr essur e Adj ust ment ) ( T o t a l Pr essur e Adj ust ment )
Loosen t he t hr ee b o l t s (2) and Loosen t he l oc k nut ( 5) and a d j u s t by
adj us t by t u r n i n g t h e i nner bear i ng t u r n i n g t h e adj ust ment b o l t ( 4) .
case ( 3 ) .
3 ) Adj ustment
1. Turn t he handwheel whi l e 2. Set t he bl anket c y l i n d e r
pushi ng t he sol enoi d ( 1 ) i n not ch and t he impression
by hand and set t he c y l i n d e r c y l i n d e r not ch a t t he pos i -
ON between t he p l a t e c y l i n - t i o n shown i n t h e i l l u s t r a -
der and t he bl anket c y l i n d e r t i on. ( Ti mi ng p l a t e 3 4 0 ~ )
and between t he bl anket c y l -
i nder and t he i mpr essi on
cyl i nder .
3. Set t he i mpr essi on pr essur e
d i a l on 0 ( t h e poi nt where
t he d i a l i s f u l l y t ur ned i n
t he count er cl ockwi se d i r e c -
t i on. )
4. Set t he p l a t e pr essur e d i a l 5. I n s e r t a 2.35mm t hi ckness 6. To adj us t t h e p a r a l l e l pr es-
on 0.13. gauge between t he bl anket sur e, l oosen t he t hr ee b o l t s
c y l i n d e r and i mpr essi on c y l - (2) and t u r n t he i nner bear-
i nder t o check t he cl ear ance. i n g case ( 3 ) . (When t u r n i n g
(On bot h t he oper at i on s i de i t i n t he cl ockwi se d i r e c -
cl ear ance w i l l be reduced.)
14. THE CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT BETWEEN THE FIRST BLANKET CYLINDER AND THE IMPRESSION CYLIEJDER
1
een t h e f i r
wi t h t h e c y l i n d e r s ON.
2) Po i n t
- s t bar e bl anket c y l i n d e r and t he bar e i mpr essi on c y l i n d e r shoul d be
Pl a t e pr essur e d i a l
Bl anket c y l i n d e r
I mpr essi on pr essur e
d i a l
( Conf i r mat i on)
* Wi t h t he bl anket c y l i n d e r and t he p l a t e c y l i n d e r ON and t he p l a t e pr essur e d i a l on 0.13,
* Wi t h t he bl anket c y l i n d e r and t he i mpr essi on c y l i n d e r ON and t he i mpr essi on pr essur e d i a l on
0 ,
e.
t he cl ear ance between t he bl anket c y l i n d e r and t he i mpr essi on c y l l n d e r shoul d be 2.35mm.
( Pa r a l l e l Pr essur e Adj ust ment ) ( To t a l Pr essur e Adj ust ment )
Loosen t h e t hr ee b o l t s ( 2) and Loosen t h e l oc k nut ( 5 ) and adj us t by
adj us t by t u r n i n g t h e out t u r n i n g t he adj ust ment b o l t (4)
case ( 3 ) .
3 Adj ustment
1 . Turn t he handwheel whi l e
pushi ng t he sol enoi d ( 1 ) i n
by hand and set t he bl anket
c y l i n d e r and t he p l a t e
c y l i nder , and t he bl anket
c y l i nder and t he i mpr essi on
c y l i n d e r ON.
I mpr essi on Bl anket
c y l i
2. Po s i t i o n t he bl anket c y l i n d e r
and t he i mpr essi on c y l i n d e r
so t hat t he not ches a r e shown
i n t he i l l u s t r a t i o n above.
( Ti mi ng p l a t e 60°)
3. Set t he i mpr essi on pr essur e
d i a l on 0. ( t h e p o i n t where
t he d i a l i s f u l l y t ur ned i n
t h e count er cl ockwi se d i r e c -
t i on. )
4. Set t he p l a t e pr essur e d i a l
on 0.13.
5. I n s e r t a 2.35mm t hi ckness
gauge between t he bl anket
c y l i n d e r and t he i mpr essi on
c y l i n d e r t o check t he c l e a r -
ance. (On bot h t he oper at i on
s i d e and t he non oper at i on
si de)
6. Loosen t he t hr ee b o l t s (2)
and a d j u s t t he p a r a l l e l
pr essur e by t ur ni ng t h e out er
bear i ng case ( 3 ) . (When
t u r n i n g i t i n t he cl ockwi se
d i r e c t i o n , t he cl ear ance w i l l
be reduced. )
+ Wner 3,-
. .
c; . ! 1-7
4" 7 ?::
7. Lccsen t he l ock n ~ t ( 5 ) and
adj us t t he t o t a l pr essur e by
t ur ni ng t he adj ust ment
( 4 ) . (When t i ght eni ng ~ t ,
r he cl ear ance w i l l be
reduced. )
( Not e)
When t he cl ear ance adj ust ment between t he f i r s t u n i t bl anket c y l i n d e r and t he i mpr essi on c y l i n d e r
i s done, t he cl ear ance adj ust ment between t he second u n i t bl anket c y l i n d e r and t h e i mpr essi on
e r may be changed. Af t e r doi ng t h i s adj ust ment , do t h e cl ear ance adj ust ment between t he
t c y l i n d e r and t h e i mpr essi on c y l i n d e r on t he second u n i t .
16. THE SIDE PLAY ADJUS
(ON BOTH THE FIRST
Purpose
To el i mi nat e any si de pl ay o f t he bl anket c y l
Poi nt
Ooerat i on si de
( Conf i r mat i on)
There shoul d be no si de pl ay o f t he
bl anket cyl i nder and t he cyl i nder ON
and OFF shoul d be done smoothly.
TMEN7
UNIT
i nde r
' OF THE BLANKET CYLINDER
AND THE SECOND UNIT)
- which w i l l cause pr i nt i ng problems.
Non oper at i on si de
(Adj ustment)
The adj ustment t o el i mi nat e any si de pl ay
i s done by usi ng t he adj ustment screw ( 1 ) .
(On bot h t he oper at i on si de and t he non
operat i on si de)
3 Adjustment
1. Loosen t he nut ( 2) and 2. Ti ght en t he 4 adj ustment 3. Set t he ON and OFF between
r el ease t he adj ustment screws ( 1 ) sl owl y al t er nat - t he pl at e cyl i nder and t he
screw (1). (On bot h t he i ng from t he oper at i on si de bl anket cyl i nder by hand t o
oper at i on si de and t he non and t he non oper at i on si de. check t he movement.
operat i on si de)
* Run t he machine and check t hat t he cyl i nder ON and OFF i s
smooth.
4. F i x t he adj ustment screw ( 1 )
a t t he poi nt where t he
cyl i nder ON between t he
pl at e cyl i nder and t he
bl anket cyl i nder i s done
wi t h t he proper pressure.
17. THE CYLINDER ON LINKAGE ADJUSTMENT BETWEEN M E BLANKET CYLINDER AND M E IMPRESSION CYLINDER
(ON BOTH THE FIRST UNIT AND ME SECOND UNIT)
Li nk 4
h.
t cyl i nder and t he i mpressi on cyl i nder shot
( Conf i r mat i on) (Adj ust ment )
The l i n k and t he spr i ng shoul d Adj ust t he l engt h o f t he spr i ng by usi ng t he
consi st ent l y cont r ol t he ON and OFF c o l l a r s (4) and ( 7 ) . adj ust t he l engt h of
o f t he t hr ust er . t he l i n k by usi ng t he screw (8).
3 Adjustment
1. Set t he cam f ol l ower ( 1 ) 2. Loosen t he set screw ( 3) and 3. Loosen t he set screw ( 6 ) and
on t he low posi t i on o f move t he c o l l a r ( 4) and set adj ust t he l engt h between t he
t he cyl i nder ON cam ( 2) . t he l engt h o f t he l i n k ( 5 ) t o c o l l a r ( 4) and t he c o l l a r ( 7 )
be 2mm. t o be 40mm.
4. Loosen t he set screw ( 8) . 5. I ns er t a l mm t hi ckness gauge 6. Check t hat t he t hr ust er (11)
between t he sol enoi d ( 9) and l i g h t l y cont act s t he pi n ( 12)
t he pl unger (10). under i t s own wei ght.
7. Fi x t he set screw ( 8) .
18. THE CYLINDER ON LINKAGE ADJUSTMENT BETWEEN THE PLATE CYLINDER AND THE BLANKET CYLINDER
(ON BOTH THE FIRST UNIT AND THE SECOND UNIT)
1 ) Purpose
When s h i f t i n g t he oper at i ng l ever t o t he posi t i on 4, t he pl at e cyl i nder and t he bl anket cyl i nder
shoul d go ON.
2) Poi nt
( For t he machines wi t h t he s e r i a l numbers from 1001 t o 1060)
( Conf i r mat i on) (Adj ust ment )
The l i n k and t he spr i ng shoul d Adj ust t he spr i ng l engt h by t he c ol l ar s ( 4 )
consi st ent l y cont r ol t he ON and OFF and ( 71, and adj ust t he l i n k l engt h by t he
o f t he t hr ust er . screw ( 8 ) .
(For t he machines wi t h t he s e r i a l numbers from 1061)
( Conf i r mat i on)
The l i n k and t he spr i ng shoul d
consi st ent l y cont r ol t he ON and OFF
o f t he t hr ust er .
(Adj ustment)
Adj ust t he spr i ng l engt h by t he c ol l ar s ( 4 )
and (71, and adj ust t he l i n k l engt h by t he
screw (8).
3 Adjustment
( For t he machines wi t h t he s e r i a l numbers from 1001 t o 1060)
1. Set t he bl anket cyl i nder and 2. Set t he cam f ol l ower ( 1) on 3. Loosen t he set screw ( 3 ) and
t he i mpressi on cyl i nder ON. t he low pos i t i on o f t he cam set t he c o l l a r ( 4 ) so t hat
( 2 ) wi t h t he bl anket c y l i n - t he l engt h o f t he l i n k i s
der and t he p l a t e cyl i nder 2mm.
adj ust t he l engt h between
t he c o l l a r ( 4) and t he
c o l l a r ( 7) t o be 40mm.
l i g h t l y cont act s t he p i n ( 10)
under i t s own wei ght.
7. Fix t he set screw ( 8) . 8. Run t he machine and s h i f t t he 9. Loosen t he l ock screw ( 8) and
oper at i ng l ever t o t he posi - push t he l i n k ( 5 ) down sl owl y
t i o n 4. u n t i l t he bl anket cyl i nder
and t he p l a t e cyl i nder goes
ON, and t hen f i x t he screw
( 8) .
(Note)
For t he adj ustment st ep " 6" . set t he l ower spr i ng l engt h t o 20mm by pushi ng t he shaf t up f or
t he machines wi t h t he s e r i a l numbers from 1061.
19. THE LATERAL POSITIONING ADJUSTMENT OF THE PLATE CYLINDER
1 ) Purpose
The pl at e cyl i nder l a t e r a l movement volume shoul d be ~2mm.
2) Poi nt
The pl at e cyl i nder l a t e r a l movement
volume shoul d be t2mm.
Adjustment d i
(Adj ustment)
Fi x t he stopper ( 1 ) whi l e pushi ng i t
agai nst t he par t (*I of t he shaf t .
3 ) Adjustment
(Stopper Adj ustment)
1. Turn t he adj ustment d i a l 2. Push t he st opper ( 1) on t he
f u l l y i n t he cl ockwi se par t ( *) o f t he shaf t and f i x
di r ec t i on and move t he p l a t e i t .
cyl i nder t o t he oper at i on
si de.
(Adj ustment Di a l ( 0 ) Posi t i on Adj ustment)
1. Turn t he adj ustment d i a l 2. Turn t he adj ustment d i a l 3. Loosen t he screw ( 2) and set
f u l l y i n t he ( - 1 di r ect i on. f u l l y i n t he (t) di r ect i on. t he i ndi cat or so t hat t he
cent er of t he gr aduat i on
scal es o f t he adj ustment
i tems 1 and 2 shoul d be
al i gned wi t h t he gr aduat i on
" 2" .
20. THE IMPRESSION CYLINDER GRIPPER ADJUSTMENT
1 ) Purpose
The impression cylinder grippers should sufficiently and uniformly grip the paper and all of the
impression cylinder grippers opening and closing timing should be the same.
2 ) Point
Both the grippers should be adjusted for the confirmation items 1 and 2.
(Confirmation 1 )
When the cam follower ( 5 ) of the
impression cylinder grippers is at
the low position of the cam ( 6 ) . the
cam foliower should lightly contact
the cam.
(Confirmation 2)
When the impression cylinder grippers are
closed, the impression cylinder grippers
should be as shown in the illustration
above.
3 Adjustment
1. Prepare a M8 nut and t he
washers.
2. Mount t he nut and t he washer 3. Loosen t he two st oppers ( 3 )
on t he spr i ng shaf t ( 1) and and t he s i x gr i pper f i x i n g
t i ght en i t u n t i l t hey cont act bol t s.
t he bl ock ( 2) .
4. Turn t he handwheel and set 5. Turn t he nut and adj ust i t so t hat t he cam f ol l ower ( 5 ) j u s t
t he cam f ol l ower ( 5) on t he cont act s t he cam ( 6) .
low posi t i on o f t he cam ( 6 ) .
6. Push t he two stoppers ( 3 ) 7. Remove t he nut and t he 8. Turn t he screw ( 7 ) and a l i g n
agai nst t he cyl i nder and f i x washers. i t wi t h t he support er ( 9 ) .
them.
9. Al i gn t he cent er of t he 10. Push t he gr i pper agai nst <he
gr i pper wi t h t he punch mark gr i pper base and f i x i t wi t h
on t he gr i pper base t o set t he b o l t ( 4 ) .
t he l a t e r a l posi t i on.
11. I ns er t a 0.15mm t hi ckness
gauge between t he st opper
and t he cyl i nder on t he
non oper at i on si de.
12. Adj ust by t ur ni ng t he screw
( 5) so t hat a 0.08mm t hi c k
s t r i p o f paper can be pul l ed
out wi t h l i g h t f orce. (The
pressure o f a l l t he gr i pper s
shoul d be uni form.)
14. Loosen t he nut (10) and set
t he l engt h o f t he 6 screws
(11) t o be 5mm.
15. Af t er f i ni s hi ng t he adj ust -
ment, i ns er t 2 s t r i p s o f
paper between t he cyl i nder
and t he st opper ( 3) and
check t hat t he pressure i s
s uf f i c i ent .
Contact
, ' c o n t a c t
At t h i s t i me t he t op edge o f t he
screw ( 7 ) shoul d cont act t he
gr i pper hol der ( 8) and t he
gr i pper .
13. Af t er removing t he 0.15mm
t hi ckness gauge, check t hat
t he pressure of each gr i pper
i s s u f f i c i e n t by usi ng t he
s t r i p o f paper.
21. THE OPERATING LEVER POSITIONING
(ON BOTH.THE FIRST UNI T AND ME SECOND UNIT)
1 ) Purpose
The oper at i ng l ever shoul d be cont r ol l ed from posi t i ons 1 t o 5 pr oper l y.
2) Poi nt
7
----I
(1
(3) Ret urni ng pawl -.-
I
(2) Feeding pawl
( Conf i r mat i on) (Adj ust ment )
The cl earance A when t he f eedi ng Posi t i on t he r at chet by usi ng t he eccen-
pawl ( 2) f u l l y pushes t he r at chet ( 1) t r i c b o l t ( 4) .
and t he cl earance B when t he r et ur n-
i ng pawl ( 3 ) f u l l y pushes t he r at chet
( 1 ) shoul d be t he same.
3 ) Adjustment
(Feedi ng Pawl)
1. Turn t he sol enoi d ( 5) ON by 2. Manual l y r ot at e t he machine 3. Check t he cl earance A a t t h i s
hand wi t h t he oper at i ng i n t he normal di r ec t i on and t ime.
l ever a t t he posi t i on 1. set t he f eedi ng pawl (1 a t
t he posi t i on where t he
r at chet i s f u l l y pushed.
(The oper at i ng l ever i s a t
t he posi t i on 2)
( Ret ur ni ng Pawl)
4. Manual l y t ur n t he sol enoi d 5. Manual l y r ot at e t he machine 6. Check t he cl earance B a t
( 6 ) ON. i n t he normal di r ec t i on and t h i s time.
set t he r et ur ni ng pawl (2)
a t t he posi t i on where t he
r at chet i s f u l l y pushed.
(The oper at i ng l ever i s a t
t he posi t i on 1.)
7. Loosen t he nut ( 7 ) and t ur n
t he eccent r i c st ud ( 4) so
t hat t he cl earances A and B
ar e t he same.
(Note)
Af t er t h i s adj ustment, check t he posi t i on o f :
1. Operat i ng l ever sect i on pr oxi mi t y swi t ch
2. Image cam
1
Loosen t he screw ( 1) and adj ust by moving t he bl ock ( 2 ) so
t hat t he l ead swi t ch i s al i gned wi t h t he magnet.
Adj ust by l ooseni ng t he screw ( 3 ) so t hat t he t op of t he
image cam ( 1 ) consi st ent l y pushes out t he p i n ( 2) wi t h t he
oper at i ng l ever on t he posi t i on 4.
22. THE PROXIMITY SWITCH TIMING ADJUSTMENT
1 ) Purpose
To adj ust t he pr oxi mi t y swi t ch t i mi ng.
2) Poi nt
( Conf i r mat i on)
When t he t i mi ng pl at e i s on 60°, t he
LD2 shoul d j u s t go o f f .
Fi xi ng
(Adj ustment)
Loosen t he two f i x i n g screws and t ur n t he
pl at e i n t he normal r ot at i on di r ec t i on and
f i x i t at t he poi nt where t he LD2 j u s t goes
o f f .
(Reference 1 )
The t i mi ng of t he CS3 and t he CS4 ON/OFF i s done as shown below on t he t i mi ng pl at e.
L D 2 O F F
I
L D 3 O F F
L D 5 O N
When adj ust i ng t he CS3 ON t i mi ng ( 6 0 ~ 1 , t he remai ni ng 3 poi nt s w i l l be set aut omat i cal l y.
(Reference 2)
When doi ng t he t i mi ng adj ustment by your sel f , use t he i nput checki ng program (keep pushi ng t he
second u n i t normal r ot at i on i nchi ng but t on and t ur n on t he main power t o ent er t he program.)
So, you can check t he t i mi ng swi t ch ON/OFF by t he buzzer sound.
23. THE CYLINDER ON SENSOR SENSITIVITY ADJUSTMENT
1 ) Purpose
Set t he cyl i nder ON s e n s i t i v i t y as hi gh as possi bl e wl t hout causi ng mi s- act uat i on t o consi st ent l y
det ect t he sheet o f paper t hat i s fed t o t he aaper feed drum.
2) Poi nt
- . I
I
Cyl i nder ON sensor
( Conf i r mat i on)
When t he sheet o f paper passes over
t he cyl i nder ON sensor, t he LD4
should 1 i g h t .
( Red
Paper feed drum
phot o sensor
(Adj ust ment )
The var i abl e r esi st or f or t i l e adj ustment
... ..VR6
LED f or t he operat i on checki ng
..... LD4
3 ) Adjustment
2. Set t he t i mi ng pl at e on 130°.
et chi ng sol ut i on st ai ns o r
f or ei gn par t i c l es on t he
sur f ace o f t he sensor ( 1 ) .
cl ockwi se di r ec t i on and check
t hat t he LD4 does not l i g h t .
4. I f t he LD4 l i ght s , t ur n t he
VR6 i n t he count ercl ockwi se
di r ec t i on sl owl y u n t i l t he
LD4 l i g h t goes o f f .
24. THE COUNT SENSOR SENSITIVITY ADJUSTMENT
1 ) Purpose
The sensor s e n s i t i v i t y has t o be adj ust ed t o consi st ent l y det ect t he paper t hat passes over t he
count sensor.
2) Poi nt
Y R l fl (/7
Recei ver
(Gray) e77
Pr oj ect or
( Red 1
Sensor L D ~ 01
( Conf i r mat i on)
When a sheet of paper bei ng pr i nt ed
passes over t he count sensor, t he
LD1 shoul d l i g h t .
\
1
(Adj ust ment )
Adjustment var i abl e r esi st or
.. . . .VR1
Operat i on conf i r mat i on LED
..... LD1
. Feeder board
phot o sensor (PHI)
3 Adjustment
1. Check t hat t her e i s no sheet 2. Turn t he VR1 f u l l y i n t he 3. I f t he LD1 l i ght s , t ur n t he
o f paper o r r et ai ner over cl ockwi se di r ec t i on and VR1 i n t he count ercl ockwi se
t he sensor. check t hat t he LD1 does not di r ec t i on u n t i l t he LD1 goes
l i g h t . o f f .
25. THE BLANKET JAM SENSOR SENSITIVITY ADJUSTMENT
1 ) Purpose
The sensor s e n s i t i v i t y has t o be adj ust ed t o consi st ent l y det ect a sheet of paper t hat i s jammed
on t he bl anket .
2 ) Poi nt
Bl anket
'
J
Mi cr o adj ustment 1
F i r s t u n i t
bl anket sensor
(PH3)
VR4
@
Rough adj ustment -
LD3
I
(Adj ust ment )
Mi cr o adj ustment var i abl e resistor...VR5
Rough adj ustment var i abl e resistor...VR4
Operat i on conf i r mat i on LED...........LD3
The f i r s t bl anket jam sensor
Bl anket
jam sensor
The second bl anket jam sensor
Second u n i t
bl anket sensor
( PHZ)
Mi cr o adj ustment -!kk
(Adj ust ment )
Mi cr o adj ustment var i abl e resistor...VR3
Rough adj ustment var i abl e resistor...VR2
Oper at i on conf i r mat i on LED...........LD2
Recei ver I,@'
VR3
(Gray) 5 %
s e a l e d 3
( Red
Rough
VR2
-
@
-
a
L
adj ustment LD2
3 Adjustment (Do t he adj ustment of bot h t he f i r s t and t he second uni t s )
1. Mount t he bl anket . 2. Rot at e t he machine so t hat 3. Set t he VR5 a t t he cent er
t he bl anket sur f ace faces ( f o r t he f i r s t u n i t )
t he sensor.
4. Turn t he VR4 i n t he cl ock- 5. Turn t he VR5 i n t he count er- 6. Turn t he VR5 about hal f a
wi se di r ec t i on u n t i l t he cl ockwi se di r ec t i on sl owl y scal e more f ur t her i n t he
LD3 l i ght s. u n t i l t he LD3 goes o f f . count ercl ockwi se di r ec t i on
from t hat poi nt .
R.P.H.
PJ
7. Run t he machine at t he cr awl 8. The second u n i t adjustment i s
speed and check t hat t he done t he same way as t he
bl anket jam sensor does not f i r s t uni t .
actuate.
(Note)
Bef ore doi ng t he s e n s i t i v i t y adj ustment, remove any st ai ns l i k e et chi ng sol ut i on and f or ei gn
par t i c l es on t he sensor surface.
(Ref erence)
When r unni ng t h e machine wi t hout a bl anket mounted, t u r n
t he bl anket jam sensor swi t ch OFF.
26. SPEED ADJUSTMENT
1 ) Purpose
* To set t he machine speed t o f ol l ow t he speci f i cat i ons.
* To al i gn t he speed i ndi cat or on t he cont r ol panel wi t h t he act ual machine speed.
2) Poi nt
( Conf i r mat i on)
Crawl Speed ....... 1,000rph
Minimum Speed ..... 3,000rph
Maximum Speed .... 10,000rph
(Adj ustment)
Crawl Speed ..... Adj usted by usi ng t he VRlO
Minimum Speed ... Adj ust ed by usi ng t he VRll
Maximum Speed...Adjusted by usi ng t he VR12
3 ) Adjustment
( I nchi ng Speed)
R.P.H.
1. Push t he cr awl speed but t on 2. Turn t he VRlO t o adj ust i t . 3. Turn t he VR10 t o adj ust t he
and s t a r t t he machine. When t ur ni ng i t i n t he cl ock- speed so t he cyl i nder s r ot at e
wi se di r ect i on, t he speed 16 t o 17 ti mes per mi nut e
w i l l be i ncreased. (about 1,000rph).
(Minimum Speed)
1. Push t he dr i v e but t on t o
s t a r t t he machine.
(Maximum Speed)
a 1 . Push t he dr i v e but t on t o
s t a r t t he machine.
2. Push t he decl er at i on but t on 3. Turn t he VRl l t o adj ust t he
and set t he speed i ndi cat or speed so t he cyl i nder s r ot at e
on 3,000rph. 50 ti mes per mi nut e
(3,000rph).
2. Push t he accel er at i on but t on 3, Turn t he VR12 t o adj ust t he
and set t he speed i ndi cat or speed so t he cyl i nder s r ot at e
83 t i mes every 30 seconds.
27. THE ALIGNMENT OF THE PAPER FEED DRUM AND THE IMPRESSION CYLINDER
1 ) Purpose
To al i gn t he paper feed drum and t he i mpressi on cyl i nder cor r ect l y.
2) Poi nt
( Conf i r mat i on)
When a sheet o f paper i s f ed t o t he
i mpressi on cyl i nder gr i pper s, t he
l eadi ng edge o f t he paper shoul d
be advanced 0.2mm t o 0.5mm from
t he l eadi ng edge o f t he gr i pper
base.
(Adj ust ment )
Loosen t he t hr ee paper feed drum gear
f i x i n g bol t s ( 1 ) and t ur n t he paper feed
drum t o adj ust i t .
3 ) Adjustment
(Rough Adjustment)
tandard l i n e
1. Mark t he t op o f t he gear
posi t i on al i gned on t he i m -
pr essi on cyl i nder st andard
l i n e usi ng pai nt .
4. Move t he paper feed drum.
2. Turn t he handwheel .and
3. Loosen t he t hr ee paper feed
t r ansf er t he pai nt t o t he
paper feed drum gear.
5. Al i gn t he paper feed drum
gr i pper base standard l i n e
wi t h t he bottom of t he gear
t oot h t hat has t he pai nt
t r ansf er r ed on t o i t .
drum gear f i x i n g bol t s ( 1 ) .
( Mi cr o Adj ustment)
1. Manual l y feed one sheet of 2. By t ur ni ng t he paper feed drum,
paper t o t he i mpressi on
so t hat t he l eadi ng edge of t he sheet is advanced 0.2mm t o 0.5mm
cyl i nder gr i pper s.
from t he l eadi ng edge o f t he gr i pper base.
, 28. PAPER GUIDE HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
1 ) Purpose
The paper gui de hei ght has t o be adj ust ed t o s t a b i l i z e t he paper feed.
2) Poi nt
( Conf i r mat i on)
The cl earance between t he paper feed
drum and t he edge o f t he paper gui de
shoul d be from 6.0 t o 6.5mm.
(Adj ust ment )
Loosen t he two paper gui de f i x i n g b o l t s
( 1 ) and adj ust t he cl earance.
(Two each on t he oper at i on si de and t he
non oper at i on si de. )
29. INFEED ROLLER SECTION SIDE PLAY ADJUSTMENT
1 ) Purpose
To el i mi nat e any si de pl ay o f t he i nf eed r o l l e r sect i on t o prevent poor r egi s t r at i on and paper
feed problems.
2) Poi nt
(The si de pl ay adj ustment o f t he l ower feed r o l l e r and t he upper feed r o l l e r )
( Conf i r mat i on)
The upper feed r o l l e r ( 1 ) and t he
lower feed r o l l e r ( 2) shoul d have no
si de pl ay.
(Adj ust ment )
* For t he upper feed r o l l e r , l oosen t he
screw ( 3 ) and adj ust by moving t he p i n ( 4 ) .
* For t he l ower feed r o l l e r , l oosen t he screw
( 5 ) and adj ust by moving t he c o l l a r ( 6 ) .
( Si de pl ay adj ustment o f t he upper feed r o l l e r dr i v e shaf t )
( Conf i r mat i on)
The d r i v e shaf t (8) shoul d have no
si de pl ay.
(Adj ustment)
Loosen t he screw ( 7) and adj ust by moving
t he c o l l a r ( 9 ) .
3) Adjustment
(The Lower Feed Rol l er )
1. Loosen t he two set screws 2. Sh i f t t he l ower feed r o l l e r 3. Push t he c o l l a r (2) on t he
( 1) . f u l l y t o t he oper at i on si de. non oper at i on si de and f i x i t
usi ng t he two set screws ( 1 ) .
(Upper Feed Rol l er Dr i ve Shaf t )
1 . Loosen t he two set screws 2. Sh i f t t he shaf t f u l l y t o t he 3. Push t he c o l l a r ( 4 ) on t he
( 3) . non oper at i on si de. oper at i on si de and f i x i t
usi ng t he two set screws ( 3) .
(Upper Feed Rol l er )
1. Loosen t he set screw ( 5) on 2. Fi x t he shaf t 16) by t i ght en-
t he oper at i on si de and t he i ng t he set screw ( 5) on bot h
non oper at i on si de. si des.
(Note)
Af t er t he adj ustment, check t hat t he movement o f each par t i s smooth.
30. THE UPPER FEED ROLLER ADJUSTMENT
1) Purpose
The upper feed r o l l e r p a r a l l e l pressure and t o t a l f eedi ng volume have t o be adj ust ed so t hat t he
sheet o f paper i s fed s t r ai ght t o t he paper feed drum wi t h t he proper backlash.
2) Poi nt
Upper feed r o l l e r
(1) Eccent r i c bushi ng
Screw d r i v er
Lower feed r o l l e r / \
St r i p of paper
( Conf i r mat i on)
* The pressure o f t he upper feed r o l l e r and t he l ower feed r o l l e r on t he oper at i on si de and t he
non oper at i on si de shoul d be par al l el .
* The upper feed r o l l e r and t he l ower feed r o l l e r shoul d cont act wi t h t he t i mi ng pl at e on 34' t o
35O.
( Par al l el Pressure Adj ustment) ( Tot al Pressure Adjustment)
Adj ust by t ur ni ng t he eccent r i c
bushi ng ( 1) .
Adj ust by t ur ni ng t he adj ustment screw
( 4) .
3 Adjustment
(Upper Feed Rol l er Par al l el Pressure Adj ustment)
1 . , I nser t two s t r i p s of paper 2. Pu l l out t he s t r i p s of paper
(0.08mrn t hi ck) between t he a t t he posi t i on where t he
upper feed r o l l e r and t he r o l l e r s s t a r t t o r el ease from
lower feed r ol l er . each ot her t o check t he pres-
sure.
3. Loosen t he two screws ( 2)
t hat f i x t he eccent r i c bush-
i ng ( 1 ) on t he non oper at i on
si de.
4. Turn t he eccent r i c bushi ng
( 1 ) t o adj ust t he p a r a l l e l
pressure. (The pressure on
t he non oper at i on si de w i l l
be i ncreased by t ur ni ng t he
bushi ng i n t he di r ec t i on o f
t he arrow.)
(Upper Feed Rol l er Tot al Pressure Adjustment)
1. Turn t he handwheel and st op 2. Read out t he t i mi ng per i od A
a t t he poi nt where t he upper t hat i s t he poi nt where t he
feed r o l l e r and t he l ower upper feed r o l l e r s t a r t s t o
feed r o l l e r j u s t cont act . r el ease from t he l ower feed
r o l l e r on t he t i mi ng pl at e.
3. Adj ust t he t i mi ng per i od A t o
be 34O t o 35O by usi ng t he
adj ustment screw ( 4 ) .
31 . THE PAPER STOP FINGER ADJUSTMENT
1 ) Purpose
The paper st op f i nger shoul d be adj ust ed so t hat a sheet of paper w i l l not be damaged when i t
comes i n cont act wi t h t he paper st op f i nger a f t e r i t i s fed out by t he feed r ol l er s .
2) Poi nt
I
(3) Paper gui de
f i nger
( Conf i r mat i on)
When f eedi ng a 0.25rnm t hi ck sheet o f
paper from t he upper feed r o l l e r ,
t he edge o f t he paper st op f i nger
( 2 ) has t o be posi t i oned j u s t below
t he paper gui de ( 3 ) .
(Adj ustment)
Loosen t he nut ( 4 ) and adj ust t he paper
st op f i nger hei ght by t ur ni ng t he screw
( 5) .
3) Adjustment
1. I ns er t a sheet of paper
( t hi ckness 0.25mm) u n t i l i t
cont act s t he paper st op
f i nger ( 2) .
2. Turn t he handwheel i n t he 3. Adj ust by t ur ni ng t he screw
normal di r ect i on, u n t i l t he ( 5) a f t e r l ooseni ng t he nut
upper feed r o l l e r ( 1 ) j u s t ( 4 ) so t hat t he l eadi ng edge
cont act s t he paper, as shown o f t he paper i s not i n con-
i n t he i l l u s t r a t i o n . t ac t wi t h t he paper st op
f i nger ( 2) . (When t ur ni ng
t he screw ( 5) i n t he cl ock-
wi se di r ect i on, t he st op
f i nger w i l l be lowered.)
(Note)
Wi t h t he upper feed r o l l e r i n l i g h t cont act wi t h t he paper, advance and r et r ac t t he paper
manually. af t er t he adj ustment. At t h i s t i me, check t hat t he l eadi ng edge o f t he paper i s not i n
cont act wi t h t he paper st op f i nger , as i t i s f ed i n t o t he machine.
32. THE PAPER FEED DRUM GRIPPER ADJUSTMENT
1 ) Purpose
A l l t he gr i pper s have t o hol d a sheet o f
and cl osi ng t i mi ng must be t he same.
paper s u f f i c i e n t l y and uni f or ml y and t he gr i pper s opening
( Conf i r mat i on 1 )
The paper feed drum gr i pper cam
f ol l ower ( 1 ) shoul d j u s t cont act low
posi t i on o f t he gr i pper cl osi ng cam
(2).
( Conf i r mat i on 2)
When t he paper feed drum gr i pper s cl ose,
t he paper feed drum gr i pper s shoul d be
posi t i oned as shown i n t he i l l u s t r a t i o n
above.
3 Adjustment
1. Turn t he handwheel and set 2. I ns er t a 0.2mm t hi ckness 3. Loosen t he two st oppers ( 3 )
t he paper feed drum gr i pper gauge between t he cam and t he 6 gr i pper f i x i n g
cam f ol l ower (1 1 on t he low f ol l ower ( 1 ) and t he cam ( 2 ) . bol t s ( 4) .
posi t i on o f t he gr i pper
cl osi ng cam ( 2 ) .
4. Push t he two stoppers ( 3 ) 5. Remove t he t hi ckness gauge. 6. By t ur ni ng t he screw ( 5 ) ,
agai nst t o t he paper feed a l i g n t he support er ( 7) wi t h
drum gr i pper base and f i x t he screw.
them.
r t t he gauge (8) between t he
set t he screw (11) l engt h gr i pper base and t he f r ont l ay.
t o be 8mni. ( a l l 6 screws).
Q * Push t he f r ont l ay agai nst t o t he gauge and f i x t he
screw ( 8 ) .
A t t h i s time, be sur e t hat t her e i s no cl earance between
t he f r ont l ay and t he gr i pper s.
10. Al i gn t he punch mark on t he
gr i pper base and t he cent er
of t he gr i pper s t o set t he
l a t e r a l posi t i on.
t he gr i pper base and f i x
t he b o l t 14) .
gauge between t he stopper
, t he edge of t he screw ( 5) shoul d cont act on t he non oper at i on si de
and t he gr i pper base.
15. Af t er removing t he s t r i p -9f
( 5) so t hat a 0.05mm t hi c k
paper, check t hat t he
s t r i p of paper i s pul l ed out
t hat t he pressure of each cl earance between t he screw
wi t h l i g h t f orce. (The gr i pper i s s uf f i c i ent by ( 5) and t he gr i pper hol der
pressure of a l l t he gr i pper s usi ng t he s t r i p o f paper. ( 6) i s from 0.10 t o 0.15mm.
should be uni form.)
(Note)
1.
Af t er t he adjustment, when t he cl earance from 0.10 t o 0.15mm between t he screw ( 5) and t he
gr i pper hol der ( 6 ) can not be adj usted, swi t ch t he t hi ckness gauge i n t he adjustment st ep
"12" from a 0.15 t o a 0.20mm gauge.
2.
Af t er t he adjustment, i ns er t 2 s t r i p s of paper between t he gr i pper base and t he stopper
bot h on t he OPS and t he NOPS and check t hat t he pressure i s proper.
33, THE PAPER FEED CAM ADJUSTMENT
1) Purpose
The paper feed cam adj ustment has t o be done so t he paper i s fed up t o t he paper feed drum f r ont
l ay pr oper l y.
2) Poi nt
( Conf i r mat i on)
The standard l i n e o f t he paper feed
drum gr i pper base and t he punch mark
o f t he paper feed cam ( 1) shoul d be
al i gned.
(Adj ustment)
Loosen t he f our f i x i n g b o l t s ( 2) and
move t he paper feed cam ( 1) t o adj ust i t .
34. THE TIMING PLATE SETTING
1 ) Purpose
To set t he t i mi ng pl at e t o i t s standard posi t i on.
2) Poi nt
Lower feed r o l l e r
( Conf i r mat i on)
When t he upper feed r o l l e r cont act s t he l ower feed r o l l e r ( 0 poi nt ) , t he t i mi ng pl at e
i ndi cat or shoul d be on t he O0 on t he t i mi ng pl at e.
3 ) Adjustment
1. Rot at e t he machine i n t he 2. Loosen t he screw ( 3 ) and set 3. Loosen t he two screws ( 4 ) and
normal di r ec t i on and st op a t t he i ndi cat or ( 1) t o f ace t he a l i g n t he O0 of t he t i mi ng
t he poi nt where t he upper cent er o f t he t i mi ng p l a t e pl at e ( 2) t o t he i ndi cat or
feed r o l l e r j u s t cont act s ( 2) . ( 1) and f i x them.
t he l ower feed r o l l e r .
35. ME PAPER FEED DRUM GRIPPER CLOSING TIMING ADJUSTMENT
1 ) Purpose
To set t he paper feed drum gr i pper cl osi ng t i mi ng t o 31° on t he t i mi ng pl at e.
2) Poi nt
( Conf i r mat i on)
When t he t i mi ng pl at e i s on 31°, t he
paper feed drum gr i pper s shoul d be
closed.
(Adj ust ment )
Loosen t he two b o l t s ( 1) and move t he g r
cl osi ng cam ( 2) t o adj ust i t.
( Conf i r mat i on)
1. Turn t he handwheel and have 2. Reverse t he machine sl owl y and st op a t t he poi nt where t he s t r i p
one paper feed drum gr i pper o f paper can be pul l ed out wi t h st r ong pressure.
g r i p a 0.08mm standard s t r i p Thi s poi nt shoul d be on 31' on t he t i mi ng pl at e.
o f paper.
3 Adjustment
1. Loosen t he two cam f i x i n g 2. When moving i t i n t he di r ec- 3. When moving i t i n t he di r ec-
b o l t s ( 1) and move t he t i o n o f t he arrow, t he t i o n o f t he arrow, t he
gr i pper cl osi ng cam ( 2 ) t o gr i pper cl osi ng t i mi ng w i l l gr i pper cl osi ng t i mi ng w i l l
adj ust it. be ear l i er . be l at er .
36. THE PAPER FEED DRUM GRIPPER OPENING TIMING ADJUSTMENT
1 ) Purpose
To set t he paper feed drum gr i pper s opening t i mi ng.
2) Poi nt
(Adj ust ment )
The paper feed drum gr i pper shoul d
rel ease t he sheet of paper, lo a f t e r
t he i mpressi on cyl i nder gr i pper s
g r i p t he sheet.
Loosen t he two cam f i x i n g bol t s (2) and
adj ust t he t i mi ng by changing t he cam
( 1 ) posi t i on.
3 ) Adjustment
1. Turn t he handwheel and have
one i mpressi on cyl i nder
gr i pper g r i p a 0.08mm stand-
ar d s t r i p o f paper.
4. Loosen t he two cam f i x i n g
b o l t s ( 2) .
2. Reverse t he machine sl owl y
u n t i l t he i mpressi on c y l i n -
der gr i pper j u s t rel eases t he
s t r i p o f paper. Read t he
poi nt o f r el ease (A') on t he
t i mi ng pl at e.
5. Adj ust t he cam posi t i on so
t hat t he paper feed drum
gr i pper j u s t rel eases t he
s t r i p of paper l o a f t e r t he
(AO).
3. Have one paper feed drum
gr i pper g r i p t he standard
s t r i p o f paper.
6. Ti ght en t he two cam f i x i n g
bol t s ( 2) .
37. THE CONNECTION ADJUSTMENT OF THE FEEDER TO THE BASE MACHINE
1 ) Purpose
The feeder shoul d be connected t o t he base machine wi t h t he cor r ect t i mi ng t o s t a b i l i z e t he paper
feed o f any paper s i z e from minimum si ze t o maximum s i z e paper.
2) Poi nt
( Conf i r mat i on 1 )
When t he upper feed r o l l e r cont act s
t he l ower feed r o l l e r ( 0 poi nt ) , t he
push gui de cam shoul d be al i gned
wi t h t he frame posi t i oni ng hol e.
( Conf i r mat i on 3)
At t he 0 poi nt , ,the t hr ee p l a t e cam
gV5 hol es on t he bper at i on si de and
t he frame hol e shoul d be al i gned.
( Conf i r mat i on 2 )
At t he 0 poi nt , t he cent er o f t he vacuum
val ve cam ( 1 ) and t he punch mark and t he cam
f ol l ower shoul d be on t he same s t r ai ght
l i ne. (Rough Adj ustment)
3) Adjustment
1. Set t he f i x i n g screw (2) of 2. Turn t he handwheel i n t he
t he vacuum val ve cam ( 1 ) i n normal di r ec t i on and st op a t
t he cent er o f t he l ong s l ot . t he poi nt where t he upper
feed r o l l e r cont act s t he
l ower feed r o l l e r ( 0 poi nt ) .
--
4. Check t hat t he push gui de 5. Loosen t he b o l t ( 4) . ( Lef t
Sect i on, Opera- hand threaded)
nsi de t he Frame)
ned wi t h t he
l l e n wrench.
f t hey @e not al i gned, ,,
al i gn them by t ur ni ng t he
shaf t .
chai n wi t h your f i nger l i g h t -
l y t o check t he t ensi oni ng.
Fi x t he chai n t ensi on so t hat
t her e i s a pl ay o f from 5 t o
1 Omm.
3. Loosen t he two f i x i n g bol t s
( 3) o f t he chai n t ensi oner
and remove t he chai n.
6. Al i gn t he cent er o f t he
vacuum val ve cam ( 1 ) and t he
cent er o f t he two punch marks
and t he cam f ol l ower on t he
same s t r ai ght l i n e and f i x
t he b o l t (4).
9. Remove t he a
10. Loosen t he t hr ee cam f i x i n g 11. Al i gn t he t hr ee pl at e cam 66
bol t s ( 5) on t he oper at i on hol es wi t h t he frame hol e
si de. ( Lef t hand threaded) and f i x t he b o l t ( 5) .
(Note)
Af t er t h i s adjustment, do t he mi cr o adj ustment o f t he vacuum val ve cam ( P. 7 3 ) .
38. THE POSITION ADJUSTMENT OF THE SHEET SEPARATOR AND THE SIDE BLOWER
1 ) Purpose
The sheets of paper shoul d be pr oper l y separated one by one by t he sheet separat or and t he si de
bl ower so st abi l i zed paper feed w i l l be secured.
2) Poi nt
Sheet separat
bl ower
( Conf i r mat i on)
The sheet separat or and t he si de bl ower shoul d be posi t i oned as shown i n t he i l l u s t r a t i o n
above.
3 Adjustment
Sheet separ at or (1)
4 - 5 m m
Sheet separat or
1. The sheet separat or shoul d 2. The sheet separat or ( 1 ) 3. Loqsen t he screw (31 t o
be adj ust ed as shown i n t he shoul d be a t a r i g h t angl e t o adj ust t he posi t i on o f t he
i l l u s t r a t i o n above. t he f ace of t he sheet sepa- sheet separat or t o be al i gned
r at or br acket ( 2 ) . wi t h t he hi ghest hol e o f t he
si de bl ower ( 4 ) .
39. THE SUCTION FEET ADJUSTMENT
1) Purpose
To secure s t abi l i z ed paper feed, t he suct i on f eet shoul d be set i n t he f ol l owi ng posi t i on wi t h t he
sheet separat or br acket a t t he l owest posi t i on.
2) Poi nt
Sheet separat or
bracket
Suct i on f oot
(Conf.i rmati on)
When t he suct i on f eet ar e a t t h e i r
l owest posi t i on, t hey shoul d be
posi t i oned as shown i n t he i l l u s t r a -
t i on 'above.
(Adj ustment)
The v e r t i c a l d i r e c t i o n i s adj ust ed by
usi ng t he eccent r i c pi n ( 1) and t he
hor i zont al di r ec t i on i s adj ust ed by
usi ng t he eccent r i c pi n ( 2) .
3 ) Adjustment
1. Turn t he handwheel and set 2. For t he v e r t i c a l di r ect i on, l oosen t he l ock nut ( 3 ) and adj ust
t he suct i on f eet a t t h e i r
by usi ng t he eccent r i c pi n ( 1 ) .
l owest posi t i on.
(When t ur ni ng i t i n t he cl ockwi se di r ect i on, t he suct i on f eet
w i l l be lowered.)
3. For t he hor i zont al di r ect i on, l oosen t he l ock nut ( 4 ) and
adj ust by usi ng t he eccent r i c p i n ( 2) .
(When t ur ni ng i t i n t he cl ockwi se di r ect i on, t he suct i on
f eet ar e r et r act ed. )
(Note)
1. When doi ng t he v e r t i c a l and t he hor i zont al adj ustment, i t i s
recommended t hat t he v e r t i c a l adj ustment be done f i r s t .
2. Af t er t he v e r t i c a l adj ustment i s done, do t he feed l ever
sect i on l at c h adj ustment. (See P. 78) s
3. Af t er t he adj ustment, t ur n t he handwheel and check t hat t he
suct i on f eet go s t r ai ght up from t h e i r l owest posi t i on.
I f t hey swing whi l e bei ng el evat ed, move t he cam ( 3 ) t o
adj ust i t . When doi ng t h i s a f t e r t he adj ustment, check t he
suct i on f eet v e r t i c a l and hor i zont al posi t i ons agai n.
40. THE MICRO ADJUSTMENT OF THE VACUUM VALVE CAM
1 ) Purpose
To set t he suct i on f eet vacuum cut t i mi ng.
2 ) Poi nt
Rot at i on di r ec t i on
When t he t a i l edge o f t he sheet o f
paper i s fed 16+_160mm, t he a i r
shoul d s t a r t t o be rel eased from t he
vacuum val ve cam.
(Adj ust ment )
Loosen t he t hr ee f i x i n g bol t s ( 4) and
move t he vacuum val ve cam (2) t o where
t he vacuum j u s t s t a r t s t o be cut .
31 Adjustment
1. Turn t he handwheel and set 2. Set t he cl earance between 3. Turn t he handwheel and feed
t he cam f ol l ower ( 1 ) on t he t he cam f ol l ower ( 1 ) and t he sheet o f paper u n t i l t he
low posi t i on o f t he cam ( 2) . t he cam ( 2) t o O.3mm by t ur n- t a i l edge i s fed 16mm.
i ng t he eccent r i c pi n ( 3) .
4. Loosen t he t hr ee f i x i n g 5. Fi x t he vacuum val ve cam (2)
bol t s ( 4) and move t he a t t he poi nt where t he
vacuum val ve cam ( 2) i n t he vacuum s t a r t s t o be cut .
di r ec t i on of t he arrow.
41. FEED LEVER SECTION LATCH ADJUSTMENT
1 ) Purpose
The l ever has t o go ON/OFF consi st ent l y when t he feed l ever i s shi f t ed.
2) Poi nt
( Conf i r mat i on)
Posi t i on t he cam f ol l ower ( 1 ) on t he hi gh posi t i on o f t he suct i on f eet v e r t i c a l cam ( 2) . and
when t ur ni ng t he sol enoi d ON, t he cl earance between t he l at c h ( 3 ) and t he l ever ( 4) shoul d be
a = 0.2mm and b = 0.
3 ) Adjustment
1. Turn t he handwheel and set 2. Manual l y t ur n t he sol enoi d ON.
t he cam f ol l ower ( 1 ) on t he
hi gh posi t i on o f t he suct i on
f eet v e r t i c a l cam 12).
3. Adj ust t he cl earance "a" t o be 0.2mm by usi ng t he eccent r i c
st ud ( 7 ) . (When t ur ni ng t he eccent r i c st ud i n t he cl ockwi se
di r ect i on, t he cl earance w i l l be reduced.)
4. Loosen t he nut ( 5 ) and adj ust by usi ng t he b o l t ( 6 ) so t he
cl ear ance "b" i s 0.
42. TENSION ADJLJSTMENT OF THE PAPER PILE TABLE CHAIN
1 ) Purpose
The paper p i l e t abl e chai n has t o have proper t ensi on.
2) Poi nt
( Conf i r mat i on)
When pushi ng down on t he cent er o f
t he chai n by usi ng your f i nger
l i g h t l y ( l k g f ) , t her e shoul d be a
pl ay o f about 2mm.
(Adj ustment)
Adj ust t he chai n t ensi on by usi ng t he
t ensi oni ng b o l t ( 1 ) .
43. THE PAPER PILE TABLE GUIDE ROLLER ADJUSTMENT
1 ) Purpose
The paper p i l e t abl e shoul d be el evat ed and lowered smoothl y by t he gui de r ol l er s .
2) Poi nt
( Conf i r mat i on)
Guide r o l l e r (4)
,Guide r o l l e r ( 2)
I ' ~ c c e n t r i c pi n (3)
The gui de r o l l e r ( 2 ) shoul d l i g h t l y cont act t he gui de st ay ( 1 ) .
3 Adjustment
1. Set t he paper p i l e t abl e. 2. Adj ust t he gui de r o l l e r ( 2) 3. Af t er el evat i ng t he paper
t o l i g h t l y cont act t he p i l e t abl e s l i g h t l y , adj ust
gui de st ay ( 1 ) by usi ng t he by t ur ni ng t he eccent r i c
eccent r i c p i n ( 3 ) . p i n ( 5) so t hat t he gui de
r o l l e r ( 4) i s i n cont act
wi t h t he gui de st ay ( 1) .
(Note)
1. When t he gui de r o l l e r cont act s t he gui de st ay t oo st r ongl y, t he paper p i l e t abl e can not be
el evat ed and lowered smoothly.
2.
Af t er t he adj ustment, check t hat t he paper p i l e t abl e is posi t i oned i n t he groove (A).
44. THE PAPER PILE TABLE DRIVE Am ADJUSTMENT
1 ) Purpose
When t he r el ease l ever i s set t o t he posi t i on, t he paper p i l e t abl e shoul d be secur el y
el evat ed by t he f eedi ng pawl.
2 ) Poi nt
( Conf i r mat i on)
When t he f eedi ng pawl ( 2 ) i s l ocat ed a t t he r et ur n posi t i on, t he cl earance between t he f eedi ng
pawl ( 2) and t he r at chet wheel ( 4) shoul d be 1.5mm.
3 Adjustment
1. Set t he pi n ( 1) a t t he l e f t si de end o f t he l ong s l o t t o f u l l y 2. Lower t he paper p i l e t abl e
push t he pol e cl ut ch. and set t he r el ease l ever t o
t he posi t i on.
3. Turn t he handwheel i n t he 4. Turn t he eccent r i c st ud ( 3 ) t o adj ust t he cl earance between t he
normal di r ec t i on and set t he f eedi ng pawl ( 2) and t he r at chet wheel t o be 1.5mm.
f eedi ng pawl ( 2 ) a t i t s ( Set t he eccent r i c st ud, so t hat when t ur ni ng i t i n t he cl ock-
r et ur n posi t i on. wi se di r ect i on, t he cl ear ance w i l l be reduced.)
45. ADJUSTMENT OF THE DOUBLE SHEET DETECTOR
1 ) Purpose
The detector has to detect any double sheets consistently.
2) Point
Adjustment knob ( 5)
Lock nut (9)
OFF side stopper ( 7)
ON side stopper (8)
Double sheet detector
3) Adjustment
(The Posi t i oni ng Adj ustment) . .
Lat er al posi t i on
Ver t i c al pos i t i on
(4)
Suct i on f oot
(3) 0 --0-- 0
I
\ Rol l er
------
1. Turn t he knob ( 5 ) t o r el ease 2. Loosen t he l ock n i t ( 3 ) and t he b o l t ( 4) and do t he l a t e r a l
t he r o l l e r (10) from t he posi t i oni ng and t he v e r t i c a l posi t i oni ng adj ustment.
feed r o l l e r .
(The ON Si de Stopper Adj ustment)
1. Loosen t he l ock nut ( 6 ) and 2. i oosen t he l ock nut ( 9 ) and 3. Turn t he screw ( 7 ) i n t he
t ur n t he ON si de st opper t ur n t he screw ( 7 ) i n t he cl ockwi se di r ec t i on h a l f a
screw ( 8) i n t he cl ockwi se cl ockwi se di r ec t i on u n t i l t he t ur n more from t hat poi nt .
di r ec t i on and f u l l y r el ease act uat or ( 2 ) goes ON.
i t from t he pl at e ( 1) .
4. Turn t he ON si de st opper 5. Fi x t he l ock nut ( 6 ) .
screw (8) i n t he count er-
cl ockwi se di r ec t i on and
cont act i t wi t h t he pl at e ( 1 ) .
(The OFF Si de Stopper Adjustment)
1. Turn t he screw ( 7) i n t he 2. Turn t he screw ( 7) from t hat 3. Fi x t he l ock nut (9).
count ercl ockwi se di r ec t i on poi nt one quar t er t ur n more
u n t i l t he act uat or ( 2 ) goes i n t he count ercl ockwi se
OFF. di r ect i on.
46. PUSH GUIDE ADJUSTMENT
1 ) Purpose
Accurate si de r egi st r at i on shoul d be secured by cor r ect l y adj ust i ng t he push gui de.
2) Poi nt
Rol l er (2)
cam (1) ?iG---
( Conf i r mat i on)
When t he upper feed r o l l e r cont act s t he l ower feed r o l l e r ( 0 poi nt ) , t he poi nt o f cont act on
t he hi gh posi t i on o f t he cam ( 1 ) and t he cam f ol l ower (2) shoul d be from 0 t o l mm.
3 Adjustment
1. Loosen t he two screws ( 3 )
and adj ust t he poi nt o f
cont act t o from 0 t o l mm.
47. CD CHAIN TENSIONING ADJUSTMENT
1 ) Purpose
The CD chai n shoul d always be pr oper l y tensi oned by t he spr i ng t o s t a b i l i z e t he CD sect i on dr i ve.
2) Poi nt
( Conf i r mat i on) (Adj ust ment )
The hol der ( 1 ) shoul d l i g h t l y cont act Ti ght en t he b o l t ( 3 ) u n t i l t he hol der
t he bl ock ( 2 ) . ( 1 ) cont act s t he bl ock ( 2 ) .
(Note)
Ti ght en t he b o l t ( 3 ) , sl owl y al t er nat i ng from t he oper at i on si de and t he non oper at i on si de. I f
onl y f u l l y t i ght eni ng one si de f i r s t then t he ot her si de, t he chai n t ensi on may not be even.
48. CD GRIPPER ADJUSTMENT
1 ) Purpose
The paper shoul d be gr i pped by t he CD gr i pper s s u f f i c i e n t l y and uni f or ml y, and adj ust so t hat a l l
o f t he CD gr i pper s openi ng and cl osi ng t i mi ng i s t he same.
2) Poi nt
( Conf i r mat i on)
The cl earance between t he CD gr i pper
opening cam f ol l ower ( 1 ) and t he CD
sprocket shaf t ( 2 ) shoul d be 1.5mrn
and t he gr i pper s pressure shoul d be
s u f f i c i e n t and uni f orm.
(Adj ustment)
Adj ust t he pressure by l ooseni ng t he b o l t
( 5 ) so t hat t he t o t a l pressure i s uni form,
3) Adjustment
1 . Turn t he handwheel and st op
at t he poi nt where t he
gr i pper opening cam f ol l ower
( 1 i s over t he CD sprocket
shaf t ( 2) .
4. Remove t he t hi ckness gauge
and have t he gr i pper s hol d
0.05mm s t r i p s o f paper and
conf i r m t he gr i pper s pres-
sure.
2. I ns er t a 1.5mm t hi ckness 3. Loosen t he f i v e bol t s ( 5 )
gauge ( 3) on t he shaf t ( 2) . t hat f i x t he CD gr i pper s ( 4)
and pus& t he gr i pper s ( 4)
agai nst t he base ( 6 ) and f i x
them.
5. Loosen t he f i v e bol t s ( 5)
and mi cr o adj ust them so
t hat t he gr i pper pressure
i s uni form.
49. TRANSFER POSITION ADJUSTMENT BETWEEN M E IMPRESSION CYLINDER AND M E CD
1 ) Purpose
To al i gn t he t r ansf er posi t i on between t he i mpressi on cyl i nder gr i pper s and t he CD gr i pper s, so
t hat t he paper t r ansf er i s cor r ect .
2 ) Poi nt
( Conf i r mat i on)
The t hr ee CD gr i pper s paper gr i ppi ng
volume shoul d be from 4.0 t o 5.0mm and
shoul d be hel d on t he oper at i on si de
and t he non oper at i on si de uni f or ml y.
(Adj ustment)
Loosen t he t hr ee bol t s ( 1 ) t hat f i x t he
CD gear and t he chai n sprocket and adj ust
t he posi t i on o f t he CD gr i pper s by t ur ni ng
t he sprocket shaf t .
3 Adjustment
1. Feed one sheet o f paper by 2. Loosen t he t hr ee bol t s ( 1 ) and adj ust so t hat t he CD gr i pper s
manual l y r ot at i ng t he paper gr i ppi ng volume i s from 4.0 t o 5.0mm by t ur ni ng t he CD
machine. sprocket shaf t ( 2) .
3. When t he CD gr i pper paper
gr i ppi ng volume on t he opera-
t i o n si de and t he non opera-
t i o n si de i s di f f er ent ,
l oosen t he screw ( 3 ) and
move t he gr i pper hol der ( 4)
back and f o r t h t o adj ust i t.
(Note)
The pr oxi mi t y swi t ch and t he t i mi ng pl at e ar e mounted on t he non oper at i on si de o f t he CD sprocket
shaf t . Af t er doi ng t h i s adj ustment, do t he adj ust ment s l i s t e d below again.
* The t i mi ng pl at e s et t i ng (P. 65)
* Ti mi ng adj ustment o f t he pr oxi mi t y swi t ch (P. 43)
50. ADJUSTMENT OF THE CD GRIPPERS CLOSING TIMING
1 ) Purpose
To set t he CD gr i pper s cl osi ng t i mi ng.
2) Poi nt
( Conf i r mat i on)
When t he cam f ol l ower ( 1) l i g h t l y
cont act s t he i mpressi on cyl i nder
gr i pper cam ( 2 ) , t he cl earance
between t he cam f ol l ower ( 3) and
t he CD gr i pper opening cam ( 4)
should be Omm.
3 ) Adjustment
(Adj ustment)
Loosen t he two bol t s ( 5 ) and cont act
t he cam ( 4 ) t o t he cam f ol l ower ( 3) .
1. Rot at e t he machine and have 2. Loosen t he two bol t s ( 5 ) of 3. the cam ( 4) to lightly
t he cam f ol l ower ( 1) l i g h t l y t he cam ( 4) .
cont act t he i mpressi on c y l -
i nder gr i pper cam ( 2) .
cont act t he cam f ol l ower ( 3)
and f i x them.
51. ADJUSTMENT OF M E CD JOGGER GUIDE TIMING
1 ) Purpose
When t he CD gr i pper s del i v er a sheet o f paper, t he del i ver y j ogger si de gui de has t o be a t i t s
f u l l y open posi t i on.
2) Poi nt
I Sl i de cam (6)
( Conf i r mat i on)
When t he CD gr i pper s cam f ol l ower cont act s t he del i ver y cam, t he crank, t he p i n and t he s l i d e
cam shoul d be on t he same s t r ai ght l i ne.
3 ) Adjustment
1. Turn t he handwheel i n t he 2. Fi x t he two screws ( 3 ) a f t e r
normal di r ec t i on and st op posi t i oni ng t he crank ( 4 ) ,
where t he cam f ol l ower ( 2) and t he p i n (5), and t he
j u s t cont act s t he paper s l i d e cam ( 6 ) on t he same
r el ease cam ( 1 ) . s t r ai ght l i ne.
(The t i mi ng where t he CD
gr i pper s r el ease t he sheet
o f paper.
52. DELI VERY TABLE DOLLY GUI DE ROLLER ADJUSTMENT
1 ) Purpose
The del i ver y t abl e d o l l y has t o be el evat ed and lowered smoothly by t he gui de r o l l e r .
2) Poi nt
( Conf i r mat i on)
There shoul d be no cl earance between
t he gui de st ay and t he gui de r o l l e r ,
and t he del i ver y t abl e d o l l y shoul d
be el evat ed and lowered smoothly.
(Adj ustment)
Adj ust by t ur ni ng t he eccent r i c pi n (2
so t hat t he gui de r o l l e r l i g h t l y cont a
t he gui de st ay ( 1 ) .
(on bot h t he oper at i on si de and t he no
oper at i on si de)
)
c t s
53. THE SENSITIVITY ADJUSTMENT QF THE DELIVERY QFTECTION SENSOR
1 ) Purpose
The sensor s e n s i t i v i t y must be pr oper l y adj ust ed so t hat t he hei ght of t he del i ver y p i l e i s
det ect ed exact l y.
2) Adjustment
1. Turn t he adj ustment screw ( 1) i n t he 2. Ret urn t he adj ustment screw ( 1 ) 90
cl ockwi se di r ec t i on u n t i l t he LED ( 2) degrees i n t he count ercl ockwi se di r ec t i on
j u s t l i g h t s wi t hout any paper on t he from t he poi nt where t he LED ( 2) j u s t l i t .
del i ver y t abl e dol l y.
( Conf i r mat i on)
Do t he act ual paper feed and check t hat t he sensor det ect s t he paper and l owers t he del i ver y t abl e
d o l l y aut omat i cal l y. When t he del i ver y t abl e d o l l y i s not lowered, t ur n t he adj ustment screw ( 1)
i n t he cl ockwi se di r ec t i on t o i ncrease t he s ens i t i v i t y .
54. ADJUSTMENT OF THE DELIVERY TABLE DOLLY LOWER LIMIT SWITCH
1 ) Purpose
The del i ver y t abl e d o l l y l ower l i m i t swi t ch has t o be adj ust ed t o t ur n o f f t he feeder vacuum when
t he del i ver y t abl e d o l l y reaches i t s l owest posi t i on.
2) Poi nt
( Conf i r mat i on)
The cam ( 1 ) shoul d consi st ent l y
push t he act uat or ( 2) of t he de-
l i v e r y t abl e d o l l y l i m i t swi tch.
(Adj ustment)
Loosen t he two screws ( 3 ) and adj ust
t hat t he act uat or ( 2 ) i s pushed by t t
cam ( 1 ) exact l y.
55. ADJUSTMENT OF THE DELIVERY JPJul SWITCH
1 ) Purpose
When a sheet of paper jams i n t he del i ver y sect i on, t he machine shoul d st op i mmedi atel y.
2 ) Poi nt
Act uat or (5)
\
7 y r e w ( 4 )
Swi t ch (3)(LS1
( Conf i r mat i on)
When t he pi n ( 1 ) cont act s t he st opper
( 2 ) , t he del i ver y jam swi t ch ( 3 )
shoul d act uat e.
(Adj ustment)
Loosen t he two screws ( 4 ) and move t he
swi t ch ( 3) t o adj ust i t .
(Note)
When t he swi t ch ( 3) i s act uat ed, be car ef ul t hat t he act uat or ( 5) i s not pushed more than 0.5mm.
56. ADJUSTMENT OF THE ROLLERS PRESSURE
1 ) Purpose
The pressure o f each r o l l e r shoul d be checked a f t e r i n s t a l l i n g t he machine, and adj ust t he
pressure so i t i s proper because t he i nk and water r o l l e r pressure gr eat l y i nf l uence t he pr i nt i ng
qual i t y.
2) Poi nt
1 . Rol l er Arrangement
2. Rol l er Pressure L i s t
Water r o l l e r ( Mol l et on) pressure
(Note)
I nk r o l l e r n i p wi dt h
( Uni t : mm)
Dampen t he mol l et on t o match t he condi t i on dur i ng
p r i n t i n g and then i ns er t s t r i p s o f paper (30mm
wide and 0.08mm t hi ck) between t he pl at e and t he
r ol l er . A pressure o f "10" means t he s t r i p o f
paper can be pul l ed out from between t he pl at e
and t he r o l l e r wi t hout t ear i ng. The pressure "8"
and "6" must be based on t he pressure "10" so
Posi t i on
-
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
pl ease use your judgment.
Ni p wi dt h
Par al l el pressure
1.5 - 2.0
2.0 - 2.5
2.0 - 2.5
2.0 - 2.5
2.0 - 2.5
Par al l el Pressure
Posi t i on
T
U
V
W
X
Posi t i on
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
Standard r o l l e r pressure
10
8
Par al l el pressure
6
6
Ni p wi dt h
-
Par al l el pressure
Par al l el pressure
2.5 - 3.0
3.0 - 3.5
3.0 - 3.5
3.5 - 4.0
3.0
Posi t i on
0
P
Q
R
S
Ni p wi dt h
3.0
3.0
3.5
3.5
3.5
3. The Rol l er Si ze and The Rubber Hardness
I NO. / Name I Outer di ameter / Ef f ec t i v e l engt h / Rubber hardness I
i
1 / I nk f ount ai n r o l l e r
2 / I nk duct or r o l l e r
t 9 INk d i s t r i b u t o r r o l l e r 1 34
I
335
(D)mm
50
31
3 ' I nk di s t r i but or r o l l e r
7 / I nk di s t r i but or r o l l e r
/ Water f ount ai n r o l l e r 40
--
355
- ------
Water duct or r o l l e r
I
I --
26
-
360
-- - - - . -
di s t r i but or r o l l e r i 26 360
28.5
34
63
34
4
5
6
20 / Water o s c i l l a t i n g r o l l e r 42 363 1 Chrome pi af ed
---- - --- - -
21 / Water form r o l l e r
-
50 360 32'
-
(L)mm
335
333
I nk di s t r i but or r o l l e r
I nk r i der o s c i l l a t i n g r o l l e r
I nk di s t r i but or r o l l e r
34
( coat i ng)
St eel pl at ed
20°
333 1 Ri l san coat i ng
335 1 35O
327 1 35O
8 1 I nk d i s t r i b u t o r r o l l e r
34 6
335
Ri l san coat i ng
35O
4 0 333 1 Ri l san coat i n4
57. ME PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT OF THE INK FOFM ROLLER
1 ) Purpose
The pressure has t o be pr oper l y adj ust ed between t he i nk form r o l l e r and t he i nk o s c i l l a t i n g
r o l l e r and t he i nk form r o l l e r and t he pl at e cyl i nder .
2) Poi nt
( Conf i r mat i on)
Each r o l l e r s pressure has t o be
adj ust ed t o t he standard value.
( Uni t : mm)
Posi t i on I Ni p wi dt h
ii;
3.5
N
(Adj ust ment )
Adjustment or der
N+O+P+Q-+R+S
3.0
* Af t er t he pressure adj ustment between t he form r o l l e r and t he o s c i l l a t i n g r o l l e r i s done, do t he
pressure adj ustment between t he form r o l l e r and t he pl at e.
3 ) Adjustment
(The Adjustment of The Pressure Between The Form Rol l er and The ~ s c i i l a t i n g Rol l er )
1. Rot at e t he machine and feed 2. Stop t he machine and a f t e r 3. Tr ansf er t he n i p ont o a s t r i p
i nk t o each r o l l e r . pausi ng a moment, t ur n t he of paper and then measure t he
handwheel and t he n i p w i l l n i p wi dt h. (Measure t he n i p
appear on t he r o l l e r . wi dt h t hat appear on t he
o s c i l l a t i n g r ol l er . )
4. Adj ust t he r o l l e r pressure
t o be t he st andard val ue by
usi ng t he adj ustment screw
( 1 ) . When t ur ni ng t he screw
i n t he cl ockwi se di r ect i on,
t he pressure w i l l be i n-
creased. (On bot h t he
(Note)
For t h i s adj ustment, t he pressure shoul d be adj ust ed
from st r ong t a weak pressure. When adj ust i ng t he
pressure from weak t o st rong, t ur n t he ni ght l at ch
l ever ON and OFF.
oper at i on si de and t he non
oper at i on si de)
(The Adjustment o f The Pressure Between The Form Rol l er and The Pl at e)
t he oper at i ng l ever t o t he when r et ur ni ng t he oper at i ng l ever t o t he posi t i on 1, t he ni p
posi t i on 3 and suppl y t he wi dt h w i l l appear on t he pl at e surface.
i nk ont o t he pl at e surface.
3. Loosen t he nu.t ( 1 ) and t ur n
t he adj ustment nut ( 2) t o
adj ust i t . (On bot h t he
oper at i on si de and t he non
oper at i on si de)
(Not e)
When t ur ni ng t he adj ustment nut ( 2) i n t he di r ec t i on o f t he arrow, t he r o l l e r pressure w i l l be
increased.
58. THE PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT OF M E INK DISTRIBUTOR ROLLER
1 ) Purpose
To adj ust t he i nk d i s t r i b u t o r r o l l e r pressure t o t he proper n i p wi dt h so t hat t he pressure i s
proper.
2) Poi nt
( Conf i r mat i on)
Each di s t r i but or r o l l e r pressure
should be adj ust ed t o t he st andard
value.
( Uni t : mm)
I G I Par al l el ~ r e s s u r e I
Posi t i on I Ni p wi dt h
H 1 Par al l el pressure I
C
(Adj ustment)
Do t he p a r a l l e l pressure and t o t a l
pressure adj ustment by usi ng t he adj ust -
ment b o l t s (11, ( 2) and ( 5) .
2.0 - 2.5
3) Adjustment
1. For t he J, K, L, M p a r a l l e l pressure and t he t o t a l pressure,
l oosen t he nut ( 3) and adj ust by t ur ni ng t he b o l t ( 1) .
(On bot h t he oper at i on si de and t he non oper at i on si de)
2. For t he C. D. E, F p a r a l l e l pressure and t he t o t a l pressure.
l oosen t he nut ( 4) and adj ust by t ur ni ng t he b o l t ( 3) .
(On bot h t he oper at i on si de and t he non oper at i on si de)
3. For t he G, H, I p a r a l l e l pressure and t he t o t a l pressure,
l oosen t he nut ( 6 ) and adj ust by t ur ni ng t he b o l t ( 5 ) .
(On bot h t he oper at i on si de and t he non oper at i on si de)
59. ADJUSTMENT OF THE INK DUCTOR ROLLER
1 ) Purpose
By adj ust i ng t he i nk duct or r o l l e r pressure so i t i s proper, t he i nk suppl y from t he l nk f ount ai n
r o l l e r t o t he i nk f i r s t r o l l e r w i l l be st abi l i zed.
2) Poi nt
I nk duct or r o l l e r
I
I nk duct or r o l l e r d r i v e arm
Col l ar
I nk
r o l
I nk duct or r o l l e r
S t r i p o f '
st andard paper j
( Conf i r mat i on 1 )
The i nk duct or r o l l e r shoul d be
l ocat ed a t t he posi t i on where i t i s
separated from t he i nk f i r s t r o l l e r
and t he duct or dr i v e arm shoul d be
l ocat ed a t t he posi t i on shown i n t he
i l l u s t r a t i o n .
( Conf i r mat i on 2)
The pressure ( p a r a l l e l pressure and
t o t a l pressure) between t he i nk duct or
r o l l e r and t he i nk f i r s t r o l l e r has t o
be proper ( a n i p wi dt h from 1 .5 t o 2.0mn).
3) Adjustment
( Posi t i oni ng of The I nk Duct or Rol l er Dr i ve Arm)
1. To posi t i on t he i nk f i r s t 2. To posi t i on t he i nk duct or
r o l l e r and t he i nk duct or r o l l e r dr i v e arm, l oosen t he
r o l l e r , loosen t he screw ( 1 ) b o l t ( 3) t o adj ust i t.
and move t he c o l l a r (2) t o
adj ust them.
(The Pressure Adjustment Between The I nk F i r s t Rol l er and The I nk Ductor Rol l er )
1. Loosen t he b o l t ( 3 ) and move
t he i nk duct or dr i v e arm (On
bot h t he oper at i on si de and
t he non oper at i on si de) and
then adj ust i t .
60. THE TIMING ADJUSTMENT BETWEEN M E INK FOUNTAIN ROLLER AND THE INK DUCTOR ROLLER
1 ) Purpose
* Adj ust t he posi t i on o f t he i nk feed volume adj ustment l ever so i t consi st ent l y feeds t he r at chet
wheel one t oot h.
* Af t er t he i nk f ount ai n r o l l e r f i ni shes one r ot at i on, t he duct or r o l l e r shoul d r el ease from t he
f ount ai n r o l l e r .
2) Poi nt
I nk f ount ai n r o l l e r
\ I nk duct or r o l l e r
( Conf i r mat i on 1)
When t he i nk feed volume adj ustment
l ever i s on 1 on t he scal e, t he pawl
( 1) shoul d move t he r at chet wheel
one t oot h.
( Conf i r mat i on 2 )
When t he i nk feed volume adj ustment
l ever i s on 10 on t he scal e, a f t e r t he
pawl ( 1 ) moves t he r at chet f u l l y t o t he
feed si de, t he duct or r o l l e r shoul d
r el ease from t he f ount ai n r o l l e r .
3) Adjustment
( I nk Fount ai n Feed Adj ustment)
1. Set t he i nk feed volume 2. Adj ust t he pawl ( 1) t o f eed
adj ustment l ever t o 1 on t he t he r at chet wheel by one
scal e. t oot h by t ur ni ng t he eccen-
t r i c pi n ( 2) .
( I nk Duct or Ti mi ng Adjustment)
1. Set t he i nk feed volume 2. Rot at e t he machine and set 3. Loosen t he screw ( 2) .
adj ustment l ever t o 10 on t he pawl ( 1 a t t he posi t i on
t he scal e. where t he r at chet wheel moves
f u l l y t o t he feed si de.
4. Turn t he cam i n t he di r ec-
t i o n o f t he arrow and set
t he screw ( 2) a t t he posi -
t i o n where t he i nk duct or
r o l l e r j us t rel eases from
t he i nk f ount ai n r o l l e r .
61. ADJUSTMENT OF THE I NK WCTOR STOP MECHANISM
1 ) Purpose
The ductor cl ut ch clearance has t o be adj usted so t hat the i nk ductor st ar t s and stops smoothly.
2 ) Poi nt
Lever (2)
(Confi rmati on 1 ) (Confi rmati on 2)
With the i nk ductor swi tch at the When the i nk ductor swi tch i s ON, t here
OFF posi t i on, when t he i nk ductor should be a cl earance of from 1.0 t o
r ol l er contacts the i nk f i r s t r ol l er ,
there should be a 0.3mm cl earance
between the l at ch ( 1 ) and t he l ever
(2).
2.0mm between t he l at ch ( 1) and the
l ever (2).
5 ) Adjustment
1. Set t he i nk duct or swi t ch a t 2. Loosen t he t hr ee screws ( 3 ) 3. Set t he i nk duct or swi t ch ON.
t he OFF posi t i on and set i t and move t he bracket ( 4) t o
so t he i nk duct or r o l l e r adj ust so ' t hat t her e i s a
cont act s t he i nk f i r s t 0.3mm cl earance between t he
r ol l er . l at c h ( 1) and t he l ever ( 2) .
4. Check t hat t he cl earance
between t he l ever ( 2) and
t he l at c h ( 1 ) i s from 1.0
t o 2.0mm.
62. ADJUSTMENT OF THE FORM ROLLER SHAFT SNAPPER
(BOTH THE INK AND THE WATER FORM ROLLERS)
1 ) Purpose
The form r o l l e r shaf t shoul d be pr oper l y l ocked by t he snapper and t he r ot at i on o f t he shaf t
shoul d not be heavy.
2) Poi nt
Form r o l l e r shaf t
( Conf i r mat i on)
Lock t he form r o l l e r shaf t pr oper l y
by usi ng t he snapper ( 2) and t he
r ot at i on o f t he shaf t shoul d be
smooth.
(Adj ustment)
Set t he snapper ( 2 ) a t t he form r o l l e r
shaf t notch. Loosen t he nut ( 1 ) and
adj ust by moving t he snapper ( 2 ) .
63. THE SIDE PLAY ADJUSTMENT OF M E FOR4 ROLLER
(BOTH M E INK AND THE WATER FOR4 ROLLERS)
1 ) Purpose
To el i mi nat e any pl ay o f t he form r o l l e r s and t hey shoul d r ot at e smoothly.
2) Poi nt
( Conf i r mat i on) (Adj ustment)
Set t he ni ght l at ch l ever a t t he OFF Loosen t he l ock screw ( 1 ) and t he nut
posi t i on, check t he si de pl ay i n t he ( 2) , and adj ust by t i ght eni ng t he screw
l a t e r a l di r ect i on. ( 3 ) .
(Note)
I f t he screw ( 3 ) i s t i ght ened t oo much, i t w i l l be hard t o set t he form r o l l e r shaf t .
64. THE PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT OF THE WATER FORM ROLLER
1 ) Purpose
To do t he pressure adj ustment between t he water form r o l l e r and t he water o s c i l l a t i n g r o l l e r , and
between t he water form r o l l e r and t he pl at e cyl i nder .
2 ) Poi nt
( Conf i r mat i on)
Each r o l l e r s pressure shoul d be
adj ust ed t o t he st andard val ue.
A : B = 1 0 : 8
(Adj ust ment )
Adj ust t he pressure B by usi ng t he screw
( 1 and adj ust t he pressure A by usi ng
t he knob ( 2 ) .
* Af t er t he pressure adj ustment between t he form r o l l e r and t he o s c i l l a t i n g r o l l e r i s done, t he
pressure adj ustment between t he form r o l l e r and t he pl at e shoul d be done.
31 Adjustment
(The Pressure Adjustment Between The Form Rol l er and The Os c i l l at i ng Rol l er )
1. I nser t a s t r i p o f paper 2. Adj ust t he pressure t o be
(0.08mm t hi ck, 30mm wide) proper by usi ng t he screw
between t he o s c i l l a t i n g ( 1 ) . When t ur ni ng i t i n t he
r o l l e r and t he form r o l l e r . cl ockwi se di r ect i on, t he
pressure w i l l be i ncreased.
(On bot h t he oper at i on si de
and t he non oper at i on si de)
(The Pressure Adjustment Between The Form Rol l er and The Pl at e)
1. Pack t he pl at e cyl i nder t o 2. I ns er t a s t r i p o f paper 3. Adj ust t he pressure t o be
i t s standard thi ckness. between t he form r o l l e r and proper by usi ng t he adj ust -
t he pl at e and s h i f t t he ment knob ( 2) . When t ur ni ng
oper at i ng l ever t o t he posi - i t i n t he count ercl ockwi se
t i o n 2. di r ect i on, t he pressure w i l l
be i ncreased. (On bot h t he
oper at i on si de and t he non
oper at i on si de)
65. ADJUSTMENT OF THE WATER DUCTOR STOP MECHANISM
1 ) Purpose
The duct or cl ut ch cl earance adj ustment has t o be done so t hat t he water duct or r o l l e r s t a r t s and
st ops smoothly.
2) Poi nt
( Conf i r mat i on 1 )
When t he water duct or r o l l e r con-
t act s t he water o s c i l l a t i n g r o l l e r
wi t h t he water duct or swi t ch on t he
OFF posi t i on, t her e shoul d be a
0.3mm cl earance between t he l at c h
( 1) and t he l ever ( 2) .
( Conf i r mat i on 2)
When t ur ni ng t he water duct or r o l l e r
swi t ch ON, t her e shoul d be a cl earance
o f from 1.0 t o 2.0mm between t he l at c h
( 1) and t he l ever ( 2) .
3 Adjustment
(4)
1. Set t he water duct or swi t ch 2. Loosen t he t hr ee screws (31 3. Turn t he water duct or swi t ch
t o t he OFF posi t i on and set and move t he bracket ( 4 ) t o ON.
t he duct or r o l l e r so i t con- adj ust t he cl earance t o be
t act s t he o s c i l l a t i n g r o l l e r . 0.3mm between t he l at c h ( 1 )
and t he l ever ( 2) .
4. Check t hat t her e i s a cl ear -
ance o f f rom 1.0 t o 2.0mm
between t he l ever ( 2) and t he
l at c h ( 1 ) .
66. THE PRESSURE ADJUSMENT OF THE WATER DUCTOR ROLLER
1 ) Purpose
By adj ust i ng t he water duct or r o l l e r pressure so i t i s proper, t he dampening s ol ut i on suppl y w i l l
be st abl e t o t he water o s c i l l a t i n g r o l l e r from t he water f ount ai n r o l l e r .
2) Poi nt
Water duct or r o l l e r
Water f ount ai n r o l l e r
Water d i s t r i b u t o r /
Water duct or r o l l e r (3) ?lt
OPS
frame
Water duct or dr i v e arm
( Conf i r mat i on 1 )
The water duct or r o l l e r shoul d be a t
t he posi t i on where i t i s separated
from t he water f ount ai n r o l l e r and
t he water duct or dr i v e arm shoul d be
posi t i oned as shown i n t he i l l u s t r a -
t i on. (For t he machines wi t h t he
s e r i a l numbers from 1001 t o 1060)
t
Water duct or r o l l e r I
OPS NOPS
Frame Frame
I
Water duct or dr i v e arm
Water o s c i l l a t i n g
r o l l e r
I Pl at e cyl i nder )
r o l l e r
( Conf i r mat i on 2 )
The pressure between t he water duct or
r o l l e r and t he water o s c i l l a t i n g r o l l e r
shoul d be proper.
(For t he machines wi t h t he s e r i a l
numbers from 1061)
3) Adjustment
( Posi t i oni ng o f The Water Duct or Rol l er Dr i ve Arm)
(For t he machines wi t h t he s e r i a l numbers from 1001 t o 1060)
1. To posi t i on t he water foun- 2. To posi t i on t he water duct or
t a i n r o l l e r from t he water r o l l e r dr i v e arm, l oosen t he
duct or r o l l e r , l oosen t he b o l t ( 3) and adj ust i t .
screw ( 1 ) and move t he
c o l l a r ( 2) t o adj ust them.
(The Pressure Adjustment Between The Water Os c i l l at i ng Rol l er and The Water Duct or Rol l er )
(For t he machines wi t h t he s e r i a l numbers from 1001 t o 1060)
1. Loosen t he b o l t ( 3) and
move t he water duct or r o l l e r
dr i v e arm t o adj ust i t.
(For t he machines wi t h t he s e r i a l numbers from 1061)
<--'*
!--\ ; :
, '--' ;
(5)
Water duct o
dr i v e arm
Cam f o l
1. Loosen t he b o l t ( 4 ) and move 2. Set t he cam f ol l ower on t he
3. Check t hat t he st opper ( 5)
t he water duct or d r i v e arm
hi gh posi t i on o f t he cam. i s l ocat ed a t t he cent er o f
t o adj ust i t.
t he hol e ( 6 ) .
( I f not , adj ust i t by moving
t he c o l l a r ( 7) .)
67. THE WATER FOUNTAIN ROLLER FEEDING MECHANISM ADJUSTMENT
1 ) Purpose
The water f ount ai n r o l l e r f eedi ng mechanism adj ustment shoul d be done t o correspond t he act ual
dampening sol ut i on suppl y t o t he number shown on t he water feed volume adj ustment scal e.
2 ) Poi nt
n (1) Pawl
pi n
( Conf i r mat i on)
When t he water volume adj ustment
l ever i s on 1 on t he scal e, t he pawl
( 1 ) shoul d feed t he r at chet wheel
one t oot h.
(Adj ust ment )
When t he water volume adj ustment l ever
i s on 1 on t he scal e, adj ust by usi ng
t he eccent r i c p i n ( 2 ) so t hat t he pawl ( 1)
feeds t he r at chet wheel one t oot h.
68. THE PLATE CLAMP ADJUSTMENT
1 ) Purpose
To adj ust t he clamping pressure o f t he pl at e clamp depending on t he t hi ckness o f t he pl at e bei ng
used.
2) Poi nt
( Conf i r mat i on)
The pl at e clamp shoul d hol d t he pl at e
wi t h even pressure.
(On bot h t he l eadi ng edge and t he
t a i l edge)
(Adj ustment)
Loosen t he st opper screw ( 1 ) and adj ust
by usi ng t he adj ustment screw ( 2) .
3 ) Adjustment
1. Loosen t he f our st opper 2. Loosen t he f our adj ustment 3. Lock t he pl at e clamp wi t hout
screws ( 1) . screws ( 2) . t he pl at e.
4. Ti ght eni ng t he adj ustment 5. Ti ght en t he adj ustment 6. Fi x t he f our st opper screws
screws (2) u n t i l t hey s t a r t screws ( 2 ) a quat er o f a ( 1 ) .
t o be hard t o t urn. t ur n f ur t her .
(Note)
1. For t he adj ustment st ep "4". when t he adj ustment screws ar e covered wi t h r ust o r i nk par t i cl es, i t
may be d i f f i c u l t t o j udge t he poi nt t hat t he screws s t a r t t o be hard t o t ur n when t i ght eni g t he
screws.
Bef ore t he adj ustment, remove t he r ust and/or i nk par t i c l es so t hat t he screw t ur ns smoothly.
2. Af t er t he adj ustment mount t he pl at e on t he cyl i nder and check t hat t he pl at e can not be p u l l out
from t he clamp.
I f t he pl at e p u l l s out from t he clamp bef or e t he p l a t e i s pr oper l y tensi oned, t i ght en t he
adjustment screws ( 2 ) f ur t her .
(The proper t i ght eni ng volume i s a hal f t o a quat er o f a t ur n. I f t i ght eni ng t he screws more t han
t hi s, t he pl at e clamp may be bent.)
69. ADJUSTMENT OF THE BLANKET CLE4NING DEVICE
( 1) The Rol l er Pressure of The Bl anket Cl eani ng Devi ce
1) Purpose
By adj ust i ng t he proper r o l l e r pressure of t he bl anket cl eani ng devi ce, t he spl ashi ng o f t he sol u-
t i o n when suppl yi ng t oo much sol ut i on i s prevented and t he proper cl eani ng condi t i on i s assured.
2) Poi nt
Check t he p a r a l l e l pressure and t he t o t a l pressure between each r o l l e r as f ol l ows.
When checki ng t he t o t a l pressure i ns er t a 0.08mm t hi ck and 20mm wide s t r i p o f st andard paper
between t he r o l l e r s and p u l l i t out . The pressure i s cor r ect when pul l i ng out t he s t r i p o f paper
a noi se i s heard.
St r i p o f paper
Cl eani ng r o l l e r
r o l l e r
( Conf i r mat i on 1 )
The pressure between t he squeeze
r o l l e r and t he cl eani ng r o l l e r
(The f i r s t u n i t )
(Adj ustment 1)
Adj ust t he p a r a l l e l pressure and t he
t o t a l pressure between t he r o l l e r s by
usi ng t he screws ( 1 ) . (On bot h t he
oper at i on si de and t he non oper at i on
si de) (When t ur ni ng t he screw ( 1) i n
t he cl ockwi se di r ec t i on t he pressure
w i l l be increased.)
St r i p o f paper
r o l l e r
',
I d l e r o l l e r
(Conf i rmat i on 21
The pressure adjustment between t he
squeeze r o l l e r and t he i d l e r o l l e r
(The second uni t )
(Adjustment 2)
Adj ust t he p a r a l l e l pressure and t he
t o t a l pressure between t he r o l l e r s by
usi ng t he screw ( 2) . (On bot h t he
oper at i on si de and t he non oper at i on
si de) (When t ur ni ng t he screw ( 2 ) i n
t he cl ockwi se di r ect i on, t he pressure
w i l l be i ncreased.)
Par al l el Dressure
Tot al pressure
I d l e r o l l e r
(Conf i rmat i on 3)
The pressure adjustment between t he
i d l e r o l l e r and t he cl eani ng r o l l e r
(The second uni t )
(Adjustment 3 )
(The Par al l el Pressure Adjustment)
Loosen t he b o l t ( 3) and adj ust t he arm
( 4) . (The p a r a l l e l pressure w i l l be
i ncreased by t ur ni ng t he b o l t i n t he
di r ec t i on o f t he arrow.)
( Tot al Pressure Adjustment)
Loosen t he b o l t (5) and adj ust t he arm
( 6 ) . (The t o t a l pressure w i l l be i n-
creased by t ur ni ng t he b o l t i n t he di r ec t i on
of t he arrow.)
(Note)
When t he sol ut i on r i ses over 2mm from t he edge o f t he cl eani ng r o l l e r , i ncrease t he pressure
between t he r ol l er s.
Adjustment o f The Bl anket Cl eani ng Sol enoi d
Pu r pose
The sol enoi d has t o be pr oper l y posi t i oned so
oper at i on of t he bl anket cl eani ng sol enoi d.
Poi nt
The f i r s t u n i t
sol enoi d ON by hand, t her e shoul d be
a 0.5mm cl earance between t he
bl anket cl eani ng oper at i ng l ever ( 1 )
and t he stopper ( 2 ) .
The second u n i t
t he bl anket cl eani ng i s done aut omat i cal l y by t
Loosen t he two bol t s ( 3 ) and move t he
sol enoi d t o adj ust i t.
( Conf i r mat i on)
When t ur ni ng t he bl anket cl eani ng
sol enoi d ON by hand, t her e shoul d be
a 0.5mrn cl earance between t he
bl anket cl eani ng oper at i ng l ever ( 4 )
and t he st opper ( 5) .
(Adj ustment)
Loosen t he two bol t s ( 6 ) and move t he
sol enoi d t o adj ust i t.
( 3 ) The Spri ng Pressure Adjustment o f The Bl anket Cl eani ng Operat i ng Lever
1 ) Purpose
When t he bl anket cl eani ng i s f i ni shed, t he spr i ng pressure has t o be adj ust ed t o t ur n o f f t he
devi ce consi st ent l y and t o r el ease t he cl eani ng r o l l e r from t he bl anket .
2) Poi nt
( Conf i r mat i on)
Mount t he bl anket cl eani ng sol ut i on
tank and when t he bl anket cl eani ng
r o l l e r i s l ocat ed i n t he cyl i nder
notch, a f t e r s h i f t i n g and r el easi ng
t he l ever i n t he di r ec t i on o f t he
(Adj ust ment )
Turn t he spr i ng hol der ( 1) t o adj ust
t he spr i ng pressure.
( 4 ) The Pressure Adjustment o f The Bl anket Cl eani ng Rol l er and The Bl anket
1 ) Purpose
By adj ust i ng t he pressure between t he bl anket cl eani ng r o l l e r and t he bl anket , so i t i s proper,
poor cl eani ng o f t he bl anket i s prevented and good bl anket cl eani ng e f f e c t i s assured.
2 ) Poi nt
Bl anket cl eani ng r o l l e r
i
Operat i ng
l eani ng r o l l e r
ON/OFF cam
( Conf i r mat i on)
Supply i nk ont o t he bl anket and
cont act t he bl anket cl eani ng r o l l e r
on t he bl anket and t ur n t he hand-
wheel i n steps and t hen check t he
ni p wi dt h t hat appears. The ni p
wi dt h shoul d be 3.5mm and shoul d be
equal on t he oper at i on si de and t he
non oper at i on si de.
3 Adjustment
(Adj ustment)
Turn t he nut ( 1 ) t o adj ust t he ni p wi dt h.
1. Set t he i mpressi on pressure 2. Supply i nk ont o t he bl anket 3. Adj ust t he n i p wi dt h t o be
d i a l on t he 0.1 posi t i on. and t he p u l l t he sol enoi d ON 3.5mm by usi ng t he nut ( 1 ) .
and check t he n i p wi dt h t hat
appears on t he bl anket .
1. For t he adj ust ment s t ep "3 ", when t h e adj ust ment nut ( 1)
i s r el eased f rom t he s t ay (2), t h e pr oper r o l l e r pr essur e
can not be assured.
Ther ef or e, a d j u s t t he r o l l e r pr essur e wi t h t he s p r i n g
l engt h pr oper l y set .
The l engt h ( A ) shoul d be f rom 1 t o 2mm t o assur e t h e
pr oper s pr i ng pr essur e.
ng t he cl eani ng o f t he bl ac
y i n t he r o l l e r s when i t i s
ch, l oosen t he nut ( 6 ) and t
i n a t e t he pl ay.
i ket , when t her e i s t oo much
l ocat ed on t he c y l i n d e r
i ght en t he b o l t ( 7 ) t o
( 5) The Hei ght Adjustment o f The Bl anket Cl eani ng Tray
1 ) Purpose
The cl eani ng sol ut i on shoul d always be a t t he proper l e v e l i n t he bl anket cl eani ng t r ay.
2 ) Poi nt
( Conf i r mat i on)
The cl eani ng sol ut i on l ev el i n t he
t r ay shoul d have a dept h o f Qmm.
(Adj ust ment )
Loosen t he two b o l t s ( 1 1 , adj ust by
moving t he br acket (2).
(Not e)
The depth of t he cl eani ng sol ut i on shoul d be measured
a t t he posi t i on shown i n t he i l l u s t r a t i o n .
Measuring poi nt
TROUBLE SHOOTING PROCEDURES
* Poor registration
* Poor feeding and delivery
* Poor printing quality
* Inconsistently cylinder ON
* Incorrect timing plate positioning
If any of the troubles listed above occur, please
refer to the procedures starting on the next page.
Checkins procedures when poor r egi s t r at i on occurs (Adj ustment)
posi t i on between t he i mpressi on cyl i nder and t he C
- ~ ....
he t i mi ng pl at e s et t i ng
-- --
Checking procedures when poor r egi s t r at i on occurs (Operat i on)
r
Order
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Checking poi nt
--
A sheet o f paper i s f ed on t he feeder board s t r ai ght
The paper si de i s from 0.5 t o l . Omm away from t he f l a t spr i ng
The ski d r o l l e r i s not on t he t a i l edge o f t he paper
The push gui de can push t he sheet accur at el y
The proper f l a t spr i ng i s used
The el ec t r os t at i c el i mi nat or i s worki ng pr oper l y
The board tapes and t he r et ai ner s ar e not set c or r ec t l y
1 3 / The upper feed r o l l e r 1 57 1
Checking procedures when poor f eedi ng and/or del i ver y occurs (Adj ustment)
Order
1
2
1 6 ( The paper feed drum gr i pper 1 61 1
4
5
Adjustment poi nt
- -- - - - -
Paper gui de hei ght
-. --
The paper st op f i nger
- - - --
The paper feed cam
1 10 1 The paper feed drum gr i pper opening t i mi ng
Page
54
7
8
9
/ 11 / CD chai n t ensi oni ng I 88
I n feed r o l l e r sect i on sl de pl ay 1 55
The paper feed drum gr i pper cl osi ng t i mi ng 1 66
The i mpressi on cyl i nder gr i pper
--
1 37
The al i gnment o f t he paper feed drum and t he i mpressi on cyl i nder 52
1 12 / CD gr i pper 1 89
( 13 I Tr ansf er posi t i on between t he i mpressi on cyl i nder and t he CD 1 g1
1 The CD gr i pper s cl osi ng t i mi ng
The connect i on o f t he feeder t o t he base machine
1 16 / The posi t i on o f t he sheet separ at or and t he si de bl ower I 73
17 ' The suct i on f eet 1 74
/ 22 1 The paper p i l e t abl e gui de r o l l e r
18
19
20
2 1
1 23 / The paper p i l e t abl e d r i v e arm 1 82 1
Push gui de 1 87
Tension o f t he paper p i l e t abl e chai n 1 80
I
The mi cro adj ustment o f t he vacuum val ve cam i 76
Feed l ever sect i on l at c h
24
25
26
27
28
29
7 8
The doubl e sheet det ect or
The CD j ogger gui de t i mi ng
Del i ver y t abl e d o l l y gui de r o l l e r
The s e n s i t i v i t y o f t he del i ver y det ect i on sensor
The del i ver y t abl e d o l l y l ower l i m i t swi t ch
The del i ver y jam swi t ch
94
95
i 96
97
98
Checking procedures when poor f eedi ng and/or del i ver y occurs (Operat i on)
Order 1 Checking poi nt
The CD a i r blower s et t i ng
1
1 2
The CD a i r blower volume i s i n s u f f i c i e n t because t he feeder back blower i s volume i s t oo /
I
st rong.
i
/ 1 / The cl earance between t he f i r s t p l a t e cyl i nder and t he bl anket cyl i nder 1 21 1
Checking procedures when poor pr i nt i ng q u a l i t y occurs
1 2 / The cl earance between t he second pl at e cyl i nder and t he bl anket cyl i nder 1 23 1
0 rde r
/ 3 The cl earance between t he f i r s t bl anket cyl i nder and t he i mpressi on cyl i nder 1 25 1
Adjustment poi nt
1 i t he second u n i t ) 1 I
Page
4 ' The cl earance between t he second bl anket cyl i nder and t he i mpressi on cyl i nder
5 ) The si de pl ay o f t he bl anket cyl i nder (on bot h t he f i r s t u n i t and
27
29
I
1 8 i The i nk duct or r o l l e r / l o 6 1
I
6 / The pressure o f t he i nk form r o l l e r
7 j The pressure o f t he i nk d i s t r i b u t o r r o l l e r
101
1 04
1 10 ' The i nk duct or st op mechanism I 1 l 0 1
I
9 / The t i mi ng between t he i nk f ount ai n r o l l e r and t he i nk duct or r o l l e r 108
/ 13 ' The water duct or st op mechanism I l l 6 1
I
1 1 The si de pl ay o f t he form r o l l e r (on bot h t he i nk and t he water form r o l l e r )
12 1 The pressure o f t he water form r o l l e r
1 14 ' The pressure o f t he water duct or r o l l e r / 118 1
113
114
1 15 1 The water f ount ai n r o l l e r f eedi ng mechanism
1 120 1
Checking procedures when t he cyl i nder goes ON i nconsi st ent l y
t he cyl i nder ON cam
-
The cyl i nder ON mechanism between t he pl at e cyl i nder and t he bl anket cyl i nder
Order
I 1 (on bot h t he f i r s t u n i t and t he second u n i t ) 1 I
Adjustment poi nt
I 3
The cyl i nder ON mechanism between t he bl anket cyl i nder and t he i mpressi on
I
cyl i nder (on bot h t he f i r s t u n i t and t he second u n i t )
1
4 The si de pl ay o f t he bl anket cyl i nder
i
' (on bot h t he f i r s t u n i t and t he second u n i t )
I
I
/ 6 / The cyl i nder ON sensor s e n s i t i v i t y 1 44 1
The pr oxi mi t y swi t ch t i mi ng 43
I
Checking procedures when t he t i mi ng i s not cor r ect
3 / The paper feed drum gr i pper
4 1 The i mpressi on cyl i nder gr i pper 1 37
1
2
5
Page Order
f
Adjustment poi nt
The upper feed r o l l e r
The paper feed cam
5
6
7
57
64
The al i gnment o f t he paper feed drum and t he i mpressi on cyl i nder
Transf er posi t i on between t he i mpressi on and t he CD
The t i mi ng p l a t e s et t i ng
52
9 1
65
MAINTENANCE CHECK LIST
MAINTENANCE CHECK ITEMS
1. General
NO. Correct
I
/
Items
I
1 jThe condi t i on and t he t ensi on o f t he
I
~ a u l t y i ~dj ust ment / Remarks
I
I 1
j
i
!
I
I
i
I
!
I
I
~
1
3 months
I
6 months
X
j
!
I
j
1
I
i
I
1
I
I
i
I
!
I
I
i
i
I
C I
1
1
X
i V-bel t
i
i x
x
x
x
-
x
X
x
x
x
X
x
I --r
2 1 The cl eani ng o f t he pump i nsi de and
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
I
' f i l t e r s i
The l ubr i cat i on o f t he pump ! x
The l ubr i cat i on and greasi ng o f t he
I
main l ubr i cat i on poi nt s, and t he
i nspect i on o f t he cent r al i zed o i l i n g
system
The f unct i oni ng o f t he saf et y cover
swi tches
The f unct i oni ng o f t he saf et y bar
swi tches
The f unct i oni ng o f t he emergency st op
x
x
x
I
but t on
The f unct i oni ng o f t he i ndi cat i on lamps
and sol enoi ds (Output checki ng program)
The f unct i oni ng o f each push but t on
swi t ch ( I nput checki ng program)
x
Unusual sounds from and over heat i ng of 1 x
1
t he pump
Unusual sounds dur i ng machine oper at i on
Level i ng t he machine
(To wi t hi n 0.05rnm/m)
x
Cyl i nder cl earance
( 1) F i r s t P.C.-B.C.; 2.53mm
( 2 ) F i r s t B.C.-I.C.; 2.35mm
( 3) Second P.C.-B,C.; 2.53mm
( 4) Second B.C.-I.C.; 2.35mm
Condi t i on; When checki ng t he cyl i nder
cl earance, f i r s t set t he t hr ee
i tems l i s t e d below
* A l l cyl i nder s shoul d be ON
* Pl at e pressure d i a l i s on 0.13
* Impressi on pressure d i a l i s on 0
2. Cyl i nder s and cyl i nder ON sect i on
No.
when t he oper at i ng l ever i s s hi f t ed t o
I tems
2
3
l t he ( 4) posi t i on
Set t i ng t he cyl i nder ON cam f ol l ower
Checking t hat t he pl at e cyl i nder i s ON
4 l checki ng t he cyl i nder ON oper at i on by
t he cyl i nder ON sensor; between P.C.-
E.C., and between B.C.-I.C.
3 months Faul t y Adjustment Remarks
3. Paper i nser t i on sect i on
NO.
1
2
3
4
5
I t ems
Par al l el pressure o f t he upper feed
r o l l e r
Tot al pressure of t he upper feed r o l l e r
(34' - 35" on t he t i mi ng pl at e)
Hei ght o f t he paper st op f i nger
Hei ght o f t he a u x i l i a r y r et ai ner on t he
upper feed r o l l e r shaf t (0.5 - l.Omm)
Si de pl ay o f t he upper feed r o l l e r and
t he l ower feed r o l l e r
3 months
x
6 months
x
1 x
x
x
x
Cor r ect Faul t y Adjustment Remarks
4. Paper feed drum and i mpressi on cyl i nder sect i on
No.
Hei ght o f t he paper feed drum gr i pper
cam f ol l ower (The cam f ol l ower l i g h t l y
cont act s t he cam a t t he low posi t i on o f
t he cam)
Set t i ng t he paper feed drum gr i pper
shaf t st opper
Par al l el i sm and cl earance o f t he paper
feed drum f r ont l a y (Cl earance; 0.2mm)
Hei ght o f t he i mpressi on cyl i nder
gr i pper cam f ol l ower (Bot h cam
f ol l ower s l i g h t l y cont act t he cam a t
t he low posi t i on o f t he cam)
Set t i ng t he i mpressi on cyl i nder gr i pper
shaf t st opper
Sheet t r ansf er adj ustment from t he
paper feed drum t o t he i mpressi on
cyl i nder
Cl osi ng poi nt o f t he i mpressi on
cyl i nder gr i pper s (A and B)
(The cl osi ng poi nt o f t he A gr i pper and
t he B gr i pper shoul d be t he same)
I
! usi ng a
s t r i p o f
paper
5. Feeder sect i on
Remarks No.
1
2
Items
Connection t i mi ng o f t he feeder sect i on
and t he main sect i on
' Adj ustment o f t he vacuum val ve cam
x
3 months
x
1 (Vacuum cut )
3
6 months
x
x
The f unct i oni ng o f t he doubl e sheet
det ect or
Cor r ect ~aul t y1Adj ust ment
6. Del i ver y sect i on
7. Image posi t i on adj ustment sect i on
No.
1
2
3
4
6 months
x
x
x
x
I t ems
Lubr i cat i on condi t i on o f t he CD chai n
The CD gr i pper pressure adj ustment
Tensi oni ng o f t he CD chai n
( Spr i ng loaded t ensi on)
Conf i rmat i on; Check t he cl earance
between t he hol der and t he bl ock
Smooth movement o f t he back gui de
(Check f or t he spray powder b u i l d up)
No.
1
2
3
.
Cor r ect 3 months
x
x
Remarks
.4
Faul t y
I tems
F i r s t u n i t v e r t i c a l image adj ustment
d i a l :
* Smooth movement o f t he d i a l
(Gear and gear wheel)
* Greasi ng
Second u n i t v e r t i c a l image adj ustment
d i a l :
* Smooth movement o f t he d i a l
(Gear and gear wheel)
* Greasi ng
The f unct i oni ng of t he cl ut ch l ever and
t he saf et y swi t ch on t he v e r t i c a l image
adj ustment d i a l
6 months
x
x
x
Adjustment
Adjustment 3 months
x
Remarks Cor r ect Faul t y
8. I nk and water sect i ons ( F i r s t and second uni t s )
adj ustment d i a l ( Pl at e cyl i nder
9. Bl anket cl eani ng devi ce ( F i r s t and second uni t s )
NO.
1
2
3
4
5
I terns
Cl eani ng r o l l e r pressure (3.5mrn ni p)
Check t hat t he devi ce does not vi br at e
when s et t i ng i mpressi on pressure d i a l
on 0.1 and on 0.3
Revol ut i ons o f t he cl eani ng r o l l e r and
6 months
x
x
3 months
x
x
I
I
i
t he squeeze r o l l e r
Condi t i on o f t he rubber r o l l e r s and t he
sponge r o l l e r s (Damage)
Cl eani ng sol ut i on l ev el
Dr ai ni ng o f t he cl eani ng sol ut i on
Cor r ect Faul t y Adjustment
i
Remarks
I
x
i
x
x
x
10. El e c t r i c a l equipment
11. Rol l er pressures and cyl i nder pressures
NO.
1
2
3
-
( Rol l er pressures)
( Cyl i nder pressures)
I t ems
Funct i oni ng o f t he spray devi ce
Cl eani ng and i nspect i on o f t he s t a t i c
el i mi nat or
Funct i oni ng o f t he t ape i ns er t er
- - - - - -
Remarks 3 months Faul t y Adjustment 6 months
x
x
x
Cor r ect
TWO-COLOR
SMALL OFFSET PRESS
2. CPU board
3. Power source circui"Board
PI . Sensor circuit board
5. inverter
6. Inverter control board
7. input circuit of the connector board illustration
8. The input circuit checking procedure
9. Error indication
10. Output circuit of the connector board illustration
1 1. Display control circuit
8 ontroi panel circuit board
13. Output checking program
14. The terminals for optional accessories and DS2
15. The CS3 and CS4 timing switches
16. Lowering the delivery table dolly
17. FLOW charts
18. List of replacement parts
19. Electrical circuit diagrams
CONTENTS
I . Outline
( 1) Hardware .................................................
7
( 2) I nput us i ng t h e ma t r i x syst em and t h e i n t e r r u p t i n g syst em ..
9
(3) I nput us i ng t h e ma t r i x syst em ............................
10
( 4 ) The f l a t c a bl e connect or .................................
12
2 . CPU board
(1) Replacement of t h e p a r t s ................................. 13
( 2) Expl anat i on of t h e b a t t e r y r epl acement ................... 15
( 3 ) The power r e s e t t i n g c i r c u i t ..............................
16
..................................... . 3 Power source circuit board
17
4 . Sensor circuit board
( 1) How t o connect t h e phot o s ens or ..........................
19
(2) How t o a d j u s t t he s ens or c i r c u i t board s e n s i t i v i t y ....... 20
(3) The i nt e r c ha nge a bi l i t y of t h e Ryobi 3302M and t h e I t e k 3985
s ens or pr i nt e d c i r c u i t board and t h e Ryobi 3200PFA and t h e
................. I t e k 975PFA s e ns or pr i nt e d c i r c u i t board
21
5 . inverter
( I ) What ' s an i n v e r t e r ? ......................................
22
(2) Expl anat i on of t h e i nput and out put t e r mi na l s of t h e
i n v e r t e r .................................................
24
( 3) I n v e r t e r adj ust ment (For t he machi nes be f or e #1131) ...... 26
....... ( 4) I n v e r t e r adj ust ment (For t h e machines a £ t e r #I 132)
30
6 . Inverter control board
............. (1) Normal r o t a t i o n and r e ve r s e r o t a t i o n s i g n a l s
36
( 2) Speed adj ust ment .........................................
36
............ (3) The speed s e t t i n g c i r c u i t checki ng pr ocedur es
37
7 . Input circuit of the connector board illustration
( 1) The i n t e r r u p t i n g i nput syst em ............................
38
.................................. (2) The ma t r i x syst em i nput
39
8 . The input circuit checking procedure
......... (1) The i n t e r r u p t i n g i nput syst em checki ng pr ocedur e
41
................... ( 2) Mat r i x syst em i nput checki ng pr ocedur e
42
( 3) The i nput checki ng program ...............................
44
...............................................
9 . Error indication 46
( 1) E-I code .......................... ... ...... .... . . . 46
(2) E-2 code ................................................. 46
.................................................
( 3) E-3 code 46
.......................... ................... (4) E-4 code . . . . 47
.................................................
(5) E-5 code 47
.................... 10 . Output circuit of the connector board illustration
49
( 1) How t o r ead t h e out put c i r c u i t i l l u s t r a t i o n .............. 49
(2) The machine count er and t h e p r i n t count er ................ 51
.........................................
11 . Display control circuit
52
(1) S t a t i c l i g h t i n g c i r c u i t .................................. 53
................................. (2) Dynamic l i g h t i n g c i r c u i t 54
12 . Main control panel circuit board ................................. 55
.......................................
13 . Output checking program 56
(1) Output checki ng program pr ocedur es ....................... 56
..................................................
( 2) Group 1 58
.................................................. (3) Group 2
58
(4) Group 3 .................................................. 59
( 5) Group 4 .................................................. 59
(6) Group 5 .................................................* 60
(7) Group 6 ................................................. 61
(8) Group 7 .................................................. 62
(9) Group 8 .................................................. 63
14 . The terminals for optional accessories and DS2 .................... 64
(1) Tape i n s e r t e r ............................................ 64
................................... (2) Feeder s a f e t y cover .. . 64
( 3) 24V t er mi nal base ........................................ 64
...............................
15 . The CS3 and GS4 timing switches
66
( 1) The CS3 and CS4 s e t t i n g pr ocedur es ....................... 66
(2) Paper f eed del ayed t i mi ng d e t e c t i o n ...................... 67
.............................................. (3) Sheet count 67
.................................................
( 4) Feed jam 67
(5) The f i r s t u n i t c yl i nde r ON ............................... 67
( 6 ) The second u n i t c yl i nde r ON ................................ 67
16 . Lowering the delivery table dolly ................................. 68
18 . List of replacement parts
( 1) Oper at i on panel ....................................... 104
.
( 2) Cont r ol box ......................................... 107
( 3) Sub c ont r ol box ....................................... 109
( 4 ) P a r t s out s i de t h e panel .................................. 111
.................................. (5) Pa r t s f o r connect i ng .. . 116
19 . Electrical circuit diagrams
......................... ( 1 ) Sub c ont r ol box c i r c u i t di agram
a ) Si ngl e phase except f o r Europe ........................
b) Si ngl e phase f o r Europe ...............................
c ) Thr ee phase except f o r Europe .........................
d) Thr ee phase f o r Europe ................................
e ) Thr ee phas e f o r t h e domest i c ..........................
( 2) Power sour ce c i r c u i t board ...............................
( 3) I n v e r t e r c ont r ol c i r c u i t ................................
.......................................... ( 4 ) Connect or board
a ) I nput c i r c u i t di agram .................................
b) Output c i r c u i t di agram ................................
c ) Pa r t s arrangement di agram on t h e connect or board ......
(5) P a r t s arrangement di agram ...............................
a ) Oper at i on s i d e ........................................
b) Non ope r a t i on s i d e ....................................
(6) Di s pl ay c o n t r o l c i r c u i t out put s e c t i o n ...................
( 7) Oper at i on panel ..........................................
a ) Main c o n t r o l pa ne l c i r c u i t board di agr am ..............
b) Sub c ont r ol panel wi r i ng di agr am ......................
c) I nchi ng panel wi r i ng di agr am ..........................
(8) I nput ma t r i x c ha r t .......................................
1. Outline
-4"
~ L . A .
r . outline j~ ee-J ~ . i 6 L L ~ bb
( 1) Hardware
Thi s machi ne' s hardware i s s t r u c t u r e d a s shown i n t h e i l l u s t r a t i o n below.
The d i r e c t i o n of t h e arrow shows t h e d i r e c t i o n of t h e s i g n a l bei ng s e nt .
Al so t he arrow wi t h t h e s o l i d l i n e means t h a t t h e wi r e o r t h e p a t t e r n on t h e
pr i nt e d c i r c u i t board i s d i r e c t l y connect ed. The arrow wi t h t h e dot t e d l i n e
means t h a t it i s connect ed t o go t hr ough t h e r e l a y o r t h e t r a n s i s t o r .
Power sour ce Trans-
c i r c u i t boar d. f o me r
1. Outline
The hardware of t h i s machine i s made up of seven pr i nt e d c i r c u i t boar ds. We
wi l l b r i e f l y e xpl a i n how each f unct i ons .
The CPU board ( Cent r al Pr oces s i ng Uni t ) i s t h e pr i nt e d c i r c u i t board t h a t
c o l l e c t s a l l i nf or mat i on such as each swi t ches s i g n a l , and t he
- -
from t he s ens or . The CPU f ol l ows t h e program on t h e P-ROM and I s s ue s t h e
out put s i g n a l s based on t h e i nput s i g n a l , whi ch c ont r ol s t h e s ol enoi d and
-. t h e LEDs.
%
b) Di s pl ay c o n t r o l - p r i n t e d c i r c u i t board dwf+
I$
With t h e s i g n a l from t h e
i ?-
t h i s i s t he p r i n t e d c i r c u i t board
t h a t c m ~ r o l s t he ,-+--l i g h t i n g ---, of t h e LEDs on t h e main c ont r ol pa ne l , t h e
"- &-
push but t on s wi t ches lamp l i g h t i n g on each i nc hi ng c ont r ol panel and t he
15"
push but t on swi t ches lamp l i g h t i n g on t h e sub
3 C) I n v e r t e r c ont r ol pr i nt e d c i r c u i t board
--- -...
With t h e s i g n a l from t h e CPU boar d,
t h a t sends t h e s i g n a l f o r normal r o t a t i o n , r e ve r s e r o t a t i o n , s t o p ,
i nchi ng, and t h e speed s e t t i n g t o t h e i n v e r t e r .
Cf. d) Sensor a mpl i f i e r pr i nt e d c i r c u i t board < M m
.PA
Thi s i s t he a mpl i f i e r pr i nt e d c i r c u i t board f o r t h e f our phot o s ens or s .
4
5 e ) Main c ont r ol p.anel pr i nt e d c i r c u i t board
The i n d i c a t i o n LEDs, t h e LED l i m i t r e s i s t o r s and t h e buzzer ( BZ2) a r e on
t h i s board. The i nchi ng c o n t r o l panel push but t on s wi t ches on t h e f i r s t
and t h e second u n i t s a r e r out ed t hr ough t h i s p r i n t e d c i r c u i t board and
connect ed t o t h e connect or board and t h e di s pl a y c o n t r o l boar d.
f ) Connector board
!&, L F - -
Thi s i s used t o connect t h e CPU board and t h e s wi t ches , t h e s ol e noi ds and
t h e ot he r p a r t s .
g) Power sour ce pr i nt e d c i r c u i t board
_-...---------- --
Thi s i s t h e d i r e c t c ur r e nt power s our ce f o r t h e c o n t r o l l e r and sends t h e
power t o each pr i nt e d c i r c u i t boar d. 5UDC
1. Outline
I nput us i ng t h e ma t r i x syst em and t h e i n t e r r u p t i n g syst em
There a r e two ways t o i nput t o t he CPU board i n t h i s machi ne, t he ma t r i x
syst em and t he i n t e r r u p t i n g syst em. Thi s machi ne' s program i ncl udes t he
pr ocedur e t o check t h e i nput ( swi t ch) c ondi t i on a t c e r t a i n t i mes ( a c t u a l l y
ever y 5/ 1000 of a second) . A t t h i s t i me, t he s i g n a l t h a t i s i n t e r r u p t e d
from t he ma t r i x syst em i s checked. Thi s i nput can onl y be checked a t
c e r t a i n t i mes , so t he CPU w i l l not r espond f o r a second t o t h e i nput change
t h a t occur s a t t h a t t i me. Ther ef or e when t h e CPU has t o know t h e t i me of
t h e s i g n a l i nput , t h i s ma t r i x i nput does not work. For example, be f or e you
go t o work i n t h e morni ng, you check t h e sky and s e e t h a t i t i s c l e a r . You
work i n s i d e a l l morni ng t hen goi ng out f o r l unch i t i s r a i n i n g out s i de . You
di d not know when it s t a r t e d t o r a i n . Because you onl y checked t h e weat her
i n t he morni ng be f or e coming t o work and a t l unch t i me you may not have
known t h a t i t r a i ne d i n t he morning. The i nput us i ng t h e ma t r i x syst em i s
t h e same a s t h i s example, t h e CPU can onl y check t h e i nput a t c e r t a i n t i mes.
Ther ef or e you cannot know when t h e i nput i s changed o r when a s h o r t s i g n a l
i s i nput t e d. I n o t h e r words t h e ma t r i x syst em does not work when i n p u t t i n g
immediate s i g n a l s o r s i g n a l s t h a t t h e mi crocomput er must know when t h e
s i g n a l i s changed. On t h e o t h e r hand, t h e good poi nt of t h e ma t r i x i nput
syst em i s t h a t i t al l ows you t o i nput a l o t of i nf or mat i on us i ng onl y a few
s i gna l s .
The o t h e r t ype of i n p u t t i n g i s t h e i n t e r r u p t i n g syst em. When i n p u t t i n g
us i ng t he i n t e r r u p t i n g syst em, t h e CPU s t ops i t s pr ocedur e and t he n t h e CPU
s t a r t s t o f ol l ow t he new i nput . For example, you have a t el ephone on your
desk i n your company. You can answer t h e t el ephone a s soon a s t h e phone
r i n g s whi l e you a r e worki ng wi t hout al ways wat chi ng your phone. Pl e a s e
r e f e r t o t h e 7. i nput c i r c u i t of t h e connect or board i l l u s t r a t i o n i t em (page
38) f o r more e xpl a na t i on about t h e two t ypes of i nput .
1. Outline
( 3 ) Input usi ng t he mat r i x system
Input t o t he CPU board
L 2 out put from
' t he CPU board
L3
J
Thi s i ndi cat es a par t of t he i nput c i r c u i t usi ng t he mat r i x system. The
i nput usi ng t he mat r i x system i s t he c i r c u i t t ha t uses t he out put wi re from
t he CPU boaPd and t he i nput wi re t o t he CPU board t o i nput a l o t of i nput
i nformat i on wi t h fewer s i gnal wi res. Thi s machine' s mat r i x system i s
sometimes cal l ed t he di ode mat r i x system because di odes ar e used i n t he
c i r c u i t . The hor i zont al l i ne s shown above a r e t he out put wi re from t he CPU
board and t he CPU determines which swi t ch condi t i on i s i nput t ed by us i ng t hese
l i nes . Thi s machine has el even of t hes e l i ne s and t hey ar e cal l ed t he
s e l e c t l i nes (L1 - ~ 1 1 ) . The v e r t i c a l l i ne s shown above ar e t he i nput l i n e s
t o t he CPU board and t he CPU i nput s t he a c t ua l swi t ch condi t i on by usi ng
t hese l i ne s . Thi s machine has ei ght of t hes e l i n e s and t hey a r e cal l ed t he
da t a l i ne s (DO - D7 ) .
The CPU out put i s s e t so t ha t onl y t he s e l e c t l i n e of L1 through L11 t h a t i s
used i s LOW whi l e t he ot her s ar e HIGH. I n ot her words, when wanting t o
i nput t he LS1 a s shown i n t he ~ r e v i o u s i l l u s t r a t i o n , t he CPU s e t s t he L1
s e l e c t l i n e t o be LOW and s e t s a l l t he ot her s e l e c t l i n e s a f t e r L2 t o be
HI GH
A t t h i s time, t he e l e c t r i c cur r ent t h a t goes t o t he L1 through t he L3 l i n e s
from t he DO dat a l i n e ar e cal l ed t he I1 t hrough t he 13. A t t h i s t i me, t he I 2
and t he I 3 w i l l not go on wi t hout t he LS21 or t he DS1 (2") s i gnal i ssued
because t he L2 and t he L3 s e l e c t l i ne s ar e HI GH. When t he LSI i s ON t he I 1
goes on, and when t he LS1 i s OFF t he I1 w i l l not go on because t he L1 l i n e i s
LOW. Therefore t he CPU judges t ha t t he LS1 i s ON when t he e l e c t r i c cur r ent
comes from t he DO, and judges t h a t t he LS1 i s OFF when t he e l e c t r i c cur r ent
does not come from t he DO. The CPU judges t he ON/OFF of t he swi t ches ot her
t han t he LS1 i n t he same way as t he expl anat i on above of t he LS1.
(4) The f l a t cabl e connector
a) Connector t er mi nal number
At t he f l a t cabl e connect or, t he t er mi nal number i s not i ndi cat ed. The
connect or has a t r i a n g l e mark, and based on t he t r i a n g l e mark t he
t er mi nal number can be determined. As shown i n t he i l l u s t r a t i o n
below, t he t er mi nal wi t h t he t r i a n g l e mark i s No. 1 and t he opposi t e s i de
of t he t er mi nal i s No. 2 , so t hen t he s i de of t he No. 1 t er mi nal i s No. 3
and t he r e s t of them a r e t he same as shown below.
Tr i angl e mark
I
Tr i angl e mark
Cable No. Socket
\
Reverse i n s e r t i o n
pr event i on t a b
Tr i angl e mark
Header
b) Connector removal and mounting procedures
" Removal procedures
Push out t he f as t ener s i n t he di r e c t i on of t he arrow a t t he same time
as shown i n t he i l l u s t r a t i o n ( b) , and t hen it can be removed as shown
i n t he i l l u s t r a t i o n (c) e a s i l y.
" Mounting procedure
Open t he f as t ener s as shown by t he dot t ed l i n e i n t h e i l l u s t r a t i o n (b) '
and mount i t s t r a i g h t from t he t op. Thi s connect or cannot be mounted
backwards. Af t er mounting, push i n t he f as t ener s t o l ock t he connect or
and check t h a t t he socket i s c or r e c t l y connected on t he f as t ener s .
2. CPU board
2. CPU board
Thi s CPU board i s mounted on t h e r e a r s i d e of t h e mi ddl e board i n t h e
c ont r ol box, and i t j udges and pr oces s es t h e i nput t e d i nf or mat i on and i s s ue s
t h e out put s i gna l . On t h e CPU boar d, t h e r e a r e t h e p a r t s and c i r c u i t s a s
shown below.
" CPU (280) .............. The c ont r ol p a r t s t h a t pr oces s t h e i nf or mat i on
f o r t he ope r a t i on of t h e machine.
" P-ROM .................. The memory t h a t has t h e program and t h e d a t a
f o r ope r a t i ng t h e machine i s i nput t e d on.
" RAM .................... The memory t h a t al l ows t he CPU t o pr oces s t h e
i nf or mat i on.
" Os c i l l a t o r c i r c u i t ..... The c i r c u i t t h a t gener at es t h e c l oc k pul s e t o
r un t h e CPU.
O I n t e r f a c e c i r c u i t ...... The c i r c u i t t h a t connect s t he i nput and t h e
out put syst em wi t h t h e CPU.
" Back up c i r c u i t ........ The c i r c u i t t h a t pr ovi des t h e e l e c t r i c s our ce
back up on t h e RAM.
( 1) Replacement of t he p a r t s
When t h e out put from t h e CPU board i s not c or r e c t even t hough t h e i nput t o
t h e CPU board i s c o r r e c t , r e pl a c e t he CPU board wi t h a new one. When
r e pl a c i ng p a r t s , pl e a s e be c a r e f u l of t he f ol l owi ng poi nt s l i s t e d below.
a ) P-ROM
[ Pa r t No. 1
CPU board wi t h P-ROM .................. 5340 61 640-2
.... CPU board ( wi t hout t h e P-ROM)
............................
5330 61 641-1
P-ROM 5340 61 801-1
Ther e a r e two r epl acement p a r t Nos. f o r t he CPU boar d, one t h a t i nc l ude s t he
P-ROM and t he one t h a t does not i nc l ude t h e P-ROM. The p a r t number 5340 61
640 i s t he e xc l us i ve b a s i c board f o r t h i s machine because it i nc l ude s t h e P-
ROM. 5330 61 641 can a l s o be used f o r Ryobi 3200PFA and I t e k 975PFA. When
doi ng t h e s e r v i c e us i ng t h e p r i n t e d c i r c u i t board wi t hout t h e P-ROM, p u l l
of f onl y t he P-ROM from t h e ol d pr i nt e d c i r c u i t board be f or e r e pl a c i ng i t ,
and mount t h e P-ROM on t h e new pr i nt e d c i r c u i t boar d. A t t h i s t i me, pl e a s e
be c a r e f u l not t o bend t h e P-ROM pi ns when removing and mount i ng t h e P-ROM.
Usi ng t he P-ROM removing t o o l f o r t h i s i s conveni ent . Also when mount i ng
t h e P-ROM, be c a r e f u l of t he P-ROM mount i ng d i r e c t i o n . Mount t h e P-ROM
s ocket not c h p a r t i n t h e same d i r e c t i o n a s t h e P-ROM not ch.
P-ROM s ocket
not c h
2. CPU board
b) Jumper wi r e
Thi s machi ne' s CPU board can be a l s o used on t h e Ryobi 3200PFA and t h e
I t e k 975PFA s o t he jumper wi r e i s used t o change t h e c i r c u i t s t o mat ch
t h e machi ne. I f t h e jumper wi r e i s not mounted c o r r e c t l y , t h e CPU board
w i l l not work, s o when r e pl a c i ng t h e CPU board wi t h a new one, p l e a s e
check t h e jumper wi r e connect i on pos i t i on. Ref er t o t he i l l u s t r a t i o n
below f o r t h e CPU board jumper wi r e p o s i t i o n f o r t h i s machine.
For t h e Ryobi 3200PFA For t h e Ryobi 3302M
and I t e k 975PFA and I t e k 3985
Se t t o 64
---------
Se t t o 128
I J 3 2 5 6 7
r---------
I
256
I 25" I
' 1 2 8 6
--
I
I
I I 64 J4 61 I
I
I J 5
1 64 J4 64 1
I I J 5
1 256 I
25" B2i64 j I 1 2 8 m
128 1 I 64 128.
Do not s h o r t c i r c u i t
t h e Ryobi 3200PFA, I
I t e k 975PFA.
r-- 1 64
J 1 2 ' L -----.
Ryobi 3302MPand I
I t e k 3985.
;CI
/
Shor t c i r c u i t t h e l ower
s i d e of t h e Ryobi 3200PFA,
-
I t e k 975PFA, Ryobi 3302M
and I t e k 3985.
For t h e Ryobi 3200PFA For t h e Ryobi 330
and I t e k 975PFA and I t e k 3985
Shor t c i r c u i t Shor t c i r c u i t
two upper s i d e s . two l ower s i d e s .
2. CPU board
c ) The i nt e r c ha nge a bi l i t y of t he Ryobi 3302M and t h e I t e k 3985 CPU board and
t h e Ryobi 3200PFA and t h e I t e k 975PFA CPU board
The CPU board t h a t i s used on t h e Ryobi 3200PFA and t h e I t e k 975PFA
shi pped from t h e f a c t o r y does not have a l l t h e f unc t i ons t h a t t h e Ryobi
3302M and I t e k 3985 CPU board has . Ther ef or e t h e CPU board t h a t i s
mounted on t he Ryobi 3200PFA and t h e I t e k 975PFA cannot be used on t h i s
machine. The CPU board f o r t h i s machi ne can be used on t h e Ryobi 3200PFA
and t h e I t e k 975PFA. The CPU board r epl acement p a r t can be used on t h i s
machine and t h e Ryobi 3200PFA and t h e I t e k 975PFA.
\J$! (-.ckLd a-5
(2) Expl anat i on of t h e b a t t e r y r epl acement ,
There i s a b a t t e r y on t h e CPU board used a s a back up power s our ce f o r t h e
memory (RAM) i f t h e r e i s a power f a i l u r e . I f t h e b a t t e r y d i e s , a lamp wi l l
l i g h t on t h e main c ont r ol panel t o i n d i c a t e t h a t t h e b a t t e r y i s dead. When
t h i s occur s , r e pl a c e t h e dead b a t t e r y wi t h a new b a t t e r y a s soon a s
pos s i bl e .
The p a r t number f o r t h e b a t t e r y assembl y ... 5330 61 646
On t h i s machi ne, when t h e b a t t e r y i s dead, t h e probl ems l i s t e d below w i l l
occur .
a ) The l u b r i c a t i o n war ni ng lamp and t h e pump f i l t e r c l e a ni ng war ni ng lamp
wi l l not ope r a t e nor mal l y.
b) The p r e s e t number of s he e t s and t he number of a c t u a l pr i nt e d s he e t s on
t h e s he e t count er wi l l be r e s e t t o 0 when t h e mai n power swi t ch i s t ur ned
OFF.
c ) The speed s e t t i n g p o s i t i o n wi l l always be r e s e t t o 3000 r ph when t h e main
power s wi t ch i s t ur ned OFF.
2. CPU board
( 3) The power r e s e t t i n g c i r c u i t
On t he CPU board, t her e i s a c i r c u i t t o r e s e t t he CPU board i f t her e i s a
vol t age drop t o t he CPU board. A var i abl e r e s i s t o r VR1 i s used on t he CPU
board t o adj us t t he r e s e t vol t age. Pl eas e do not t ouch t he var i abl e
r e s i s t o r VR1 because i t has al r eady been adj ust ed i n t he f act or y so i t
r e s e t s t he CPU board a t 4. 8V.
VR1 Bat t er y
A '
f-c 1
L~ en - I,' nHn. \ m-n A d
3. Power source circuit board
The power sour ce c i r c u i t board s uppl i e s DCl 2 V and DC24V t o be t he power
s our ce f o r a l l of t he c ont r ol c i r c u i t s ot he r t han t he CPU and s uppl i e s DC5V
t o be t he power of t h e CPU boar d.
a) YC1 0 2
AC16V and AC18V i s s uppl i ed from t he t r ans f or mer a t t h e back of t h e
c ont r ol box.
" No. 1 pi n and No. 4 pi n, o r No. 1 p i n and No. 5 pi n
They suppl y t h e AC power s our ce f o r DC24V and DC12V. Usual l y us e t he
AC18V (No. 1 p i n and No. 4 in), but i f t h e DC24V vol t a ge i s low,
change t he l i n e from t h e AC18V ( t h e No. 4 in) t o t h e Ac 20V ( t he No. 5
pi n) .
" No. 3 pi n and No. 6 p i n
These suppl y t h e AC16V f o r DC5V.
b) MC103
It s uppl i e s t h e DC12V and t h e DC24V t o t h e connect or boar d.
" No. 1 p i n ..... +24V
" No. 2 pi n ..... +12V
" No. 3 p i n ..... OV
3. Power source circuit board
It s uppl i e s t h e DC5V t o t he CPU boar d.
O No. 1 pi n ..... OV
Thi s va r i a bl e r e s i s t o r i s f o r t he DC5V out put vol t a ge adj ust ment . I t has
been adj us t ed t o 5.1V f o r t he out put vol t a ge i n t h e f a c t or y, s o do not
t ouch t h i s v a r i a b l e r e s i s t o r .
e ) F1
Thi s i s t h e f us e f o r t he s hor t c i r c u i t pr ot e c t i ng t he DC24V c i r c u i t .
When t he f us e blows, r e pl a c e i t wi t h a 10A f us e .
10A f us e p a r t No. ..... 97 722
f ) R12
Thi s l i mi t e d r e s i s t o r f o r t he DC12V c i r c u i t i s mounted a t t h e back of t h e
c i r c u i t boar d. I f t h e DC12V c i r c u i t i s s hor t c i r c u i t e d , t h i s r e s i s t o r
w i l l heat up and br eak down. When t h i s r e s i s t o r br eaks down, mount a new
2W10C2 r e s i s t o r on t h e back s ur f a c e of t h e c i r c u i t board.
4. Sensor circuit board
4. Sensor circuit board
Thi s c i r c u i t board hol ds t h e f our phot o s ens or s a mpl i f i e r s on i t .
(1) How t o connect t h e phot o s ens or
Recei ver
V R ~ I @
Micro adj ust ment VR5
Recei ver
Rough adj ust ment VR4
LD3 (7
r o adj ust ment VR3
( ~r o wn )
K
Rough adj ust ment VR2
LD2
Recei ver
(Red)
Paper f eed drum phot o s ens or ( P H ~ )
F i r s t u n i t bl anket jam s ens or (PH~)
Second u n i t bl anket jam s ens or (PH2)
Feeder board phot o s ens or (PHI)
(Count s ens or )
a
4. Sensor circuit board
( 2) How t o a d j u s t t he s ens or c i r c u i t board s e n s i t i v i t y
a) Paper f eed drum phot o s ens or (PH4)
1) St op t he machine a t 130 degr ees on t h e t i mi ng p l a t e .
2) Turn t h e VR6 f u l l y i n t he cl ockwi se d i r e c t i o n and check t h a t t h e LD4
l i g h t goes o f f .
3) I f t h e LD4 l i g h t does not go o f f , t u r n t h e VR6 i n t he count er -
cl ockwi se d i r e c t i o n u n t i l t h e
The f i r s t u n i t bl anket jam s ens or (PH3)
-- Rough ad j us tment --
I ) Se t t h e VR5 f o r t h e mi cr o adj ust ment a t t h e
2) Turn t h e VR4 f o r t he rough adj ust ment i n t h e cl ockwi se d i r e c t i o n u n t i l
d i r e c t i o n u n t i l t h e LD3 l i g h t goes o f f .
2) Af t e r t h e LD3 l i g h t goes o f f , t u r n t he VR5 i n t h e count er cl ockwi se
d i r e c t i o n appr oxi mat el y ha l f a s c a l e l e ngt h.
(Note) When a dj us t i ng t h e s e n s i t i v i t y , check t h a t t h e bl anket i s pos i -
t i oned over t h e s ens or . Af t e r t h e adj ust ment , r un t he machi ne and
check t h a t t he bl anket jam d e t e c t o r does not a c t ua t e .
c ) The second u n i t bl anket jam s ens or (PH2)
The s e n s i t i v i t y adj ust ment i s t he same a s t h e f i r s t u n i t bl anket jam
s ens or .
d) Feeder board phot o s ens or (PHI)
1) Check t h a t no r e t a i n e r s o r paper i s over t he f e e de r board phot o s ens or .
2) Turn t h e VR1 f u l l y i n t h e cl ockwi se d i r e c t i o n and check t h a t t h e LDI
l i g h t goes o f f .
3) I f t h e LDI l i g h t does not go o f f , t u r n t h e VR1 i n t h e count er cl ockwi se
d i r e c t i o n u n t i l t h e LDI e s o f f .
4. Sensor circuit board
( 3) The i nt e r c ha nge a bi l i t y of t h e Ryobi 3302M and t h e I t e k 3985 s e ns or pr i nt e d
c i r c u i t board and t h e Ryobi 3200PFA and t h e I t e k 975PFA s ens or pr i nt e d
c i r c u i t board
These machines pr i nt e d c i r c u i t boar ds have 2 jumper wi r e s mounted s o it can
be used on bot h t h e Ryobi 3200PFA and t h e I t e k 975PFA. When r e pl a c i ng it
wi t h a new one, check t h a t t h e 2 jumper wi r e s a r e pr ope r l y connect ed t he
same way as shown i n t h e i l l u s t r a t i o n below.
For t h e Ryobi 3302M
and I t e k 3985 1
For t h e Ryobi 3200PFA
and I t e k 975PFA 1
5. Inverter
5. Inverter
( 1) What's an i nver t er ?
The dr i ve motor of t h i s machine i s dr i ven by an i nver t er . Normally, t he
r e l a t i o n among t he r evol ut i on speed and vol t age, frequency and t orque of an
i nduct i on motor i s a s below;
N: Revolution (rpm)
P: Pol es of motor
T: Torque
V: Terminal vol t age
f : Frequency (HZ)
s : Sl i p
K: Constant
An i nver t er i s used t o change t he a l t e r na t e cur r ent t o make d i r e c t cur r ent
and t hen f ur t he r changes it back t o t he a l t e r n a t e cur r ent of opt i onal
frequency by u t i l i z i n g t he d i r e c t cur r ent . Then, by changing t he frequency
of an i nduct i on motor, t he speed can be cont r ol l ed. That i s t he number of
r evol ut i ons "N" can be changed by changing t he val ue "f" i n t he above
equat i on.
Service power
Invcrtcr
50Hz or 60Hz
AC of opt l vr ~al fre-
t o DC quency 1s securcd
Therefore, provided t he s l i p of "O", t h i s machine can change t he r evol ut i on
speed of t he dr i ve motor from 180 rpm t o 3600 rpm.
Nmin = I 2 O = 180 (rpm)
4
Nmax =
120 x 120
4
= 3600 (rpm)
From t he above equat i on ( 2) , however, a const ant out put t orque of t he dr i ve
motor cannot be obt ai ned onl y by changing t he frequency "f". An i nver t er i s
used t o keep t he V/f const ant by changing t he vol t age "V" appl i ed t o t he
motor si mul t aneousl y wi t h t he change of frequency "f". Thi s means t ha t t he
vol t age appl i ed t o t he dr i ve motor of t h i s machine i s not always 3 phase
200V, but a vol t age correspondi ng t o t he frequency i s appl i ed t o t he motor.
Shown on t he next page i s t he r e l a t i o n (V/f pat t er n) between frequency and
vol t age.
5. Inverter
<V/f pat t er n >
6000 8000 10000
&
Machine r evol ut i on speed (R.P. H.)
0
( ~ o t e ) The hor i zont al axi s shows t he out put frequency of t he i nve r t e r and t he
machine r evol ut i on speed, whi l e t he v e r t i c a l axi s shows t he out put
vol t age of t he i nver t er .
I I I I I I I I I I I
I
20 40 60 80 100 - 120
Output frequency ( HZ 1
I I I I I I I I I I
5. Inverter
( 2) Expl anat i on of t h e i nput and out put t er mi nal s of t h e i n v e r t e r
" The wi r i ng method t o t he t e r mi na l bl ock of i n v e r t e r i s shown below.
<TB2 (For t he machines bef or e / , I 131 )>
Wire
Wire
Wire
Wire
Wire
Wire
Wire
No.300 t o MC10-1 Brown l i n e
No.301 t o MC10-2 Red l i n e
No.302 t o MC10-3 Orange l i n e
No.303 t o MC10-4 Yellow l i n e
No.304 t o MC10-5 Li ght bl ue l i n e
No.305 t o MC10-6 Blue l i n e
J
No.306 t o MC10-7 Vi ol e t l i n e
< TB2 or t h e machines a f t e r 1 132)>
Wire No. 302 t o MC10-3 Orange l i n e
Wire No.303 t o MC10-4 Yellow l i n e
Wire No.304 1 t o MC10-5 Li ght Blue l i n e
Wire No. 305 t o MC10-6 Blue l i n e
Wire No.306 t o MC10-7 Vi ol e t l i n e
<TB1 ( f or a 3 phase machine)>
To t h e
c ont r ol
t h e d r i v e mot or
5. Inverter
<TB1 ( f o r a s i n g l e phase machi ne)>
--7 1
To t h e s u
-i
(: c ' ( 4- @' L
c ont r ol box To t h e d r i v e mot or
Noi se f i l t e r i s a l s o connect ed t o R, S, and T of t h e t e r mi na l bl ock (TBI)
above.
a ) Power s our ce ..... R.S.T
3 phase 200V o r s i n g l e phase 200V i s s uppl i ed t o t h e i n v e r t e r . I n t he
cas e of a s i n g l e phase machine, T- l i ne i nput t e r mi na l i s not used.
b) Out put t e r mi na l ..... U.V.W
Connected t o t he d r i v e motor.
c ) Dr i ve s i gna l ..... STF (Wire N0. 302) ~ STR (Wire ~ o . 3 0 3 ) , SD ( wi r e ~ 0 . 3 0 4 )
When t h e r e l a y i s connect i ng t he STF and t he SD, t h e d r i v e mot or wi l l
r o t a t e i n t h e normal d i r e c t i o n , and when i t i s connect i ng t h e STR and t h e
SD', t h e d r i v e motor wi l l r o t a t e i n t h e r e ve r s e d i r e c t i o n .
d) Reset s i g n a l ..... RES (Wire No. 305), SD (Wire No.306)
Thi s c i r c u i t r e s e t s t h e i n v e r t e r .
When t h e r e l a y i s connect i ng t h e RES and t he SD, t h e i n v e r t e r wi l l be
r e s e t t o s t op t he d r i v e motor qui ckl y.
e ) Speed s e t t i n g t e r mi na l ..... 2 (Wire No.300), 5 (Wire No.301)
2 ..... Speed s e t vol t a ge s uppl i ed
By i nc r e a s i ng o r r educi ng t h e DC vol t a ge t o t he t e r mi na l s 2 and 5, t h e
d r i v e mot or speed i s c ont r ol l e d.
The r e l a t i o n s h i p of t h e d r i v e mot or speed and t h e v o l t a g e i s shown i n t h e
l i s t below.
Machine speed
I OOOrph
3000rph
Vol t age between t h e t e r mi na l s 2 and 5
about 0.5V
about 1 .4V
7000rph
10000rph
about 3.3V
about 4.7V
5. Inverter
( 3 ) I n v e r t e r adj ust ment ( For t h e machi nes be f or e 111 131 )
RES S o FM
0.63 &,
(1) Power ..... Power lamp
When a 3 phase o r a s i n g l e phase power s our ce i s s uppl i ed t o t he
i n v e r t e r , t h i s LED l i g h t s up.
( 2) Alarm .. . . . Warning lamp
When t h e f ol l owi ng t r oubl e s occur , t h i s LED l i g h t s up and t he d r i v e
mot or s t ops . I n t h i s c a s e , f i r s t fix t h e cause of t h e t r oubl e .
Then, push t h e machine s"top but t on o r t u r n OFF t h e power, whi ch wi l l
r e s e t t h e i n v e r t e r al l owi ng r e- oper at i on.
( 3 ) , (4) ACCEL . . . . . Acceleration time setting
against overcurrent exceeding
of the inverter. drive motor.
Check for a proper accelera-
tion/deceleration time, (Refer
to (31, (4) and (51, (6))
Check for a short on the output
side of the inverter.
A switch is used to set the acceleration time of the drive motor. The
multiplying factor is set with the switch (3) and the time with the dial
( 4 ) .
When the switch (3) is shifted upward (xIO), any time from 0 sec. to 150
sec. can be set with the dial (4).
cutoff
Instanta-
neous power
failure
protection
Overcurrent
cutoff
(Electro-
thermal)
Fan
overheat
protection
When the switch (3) is shifted downward (x0.2), any time from 0 sec. to
3 sec. can be set with the dial (4).
Set the acceleration time of this machine to 5 seconds. With the switch
(3) at the neutral ( xl ) , set the dial (4) to "5".
protective circuit actuates.
The protective circuit actuates
against an instantaneous power
failure of more than 15 micro
seconds to prevent malfunction.
This inverter has a built-in
electrothermal relay. An
overload on the drive motor
actuates the protective circuit.
When the cooling fans overheat
due to the decrease of the
cooling effect of the
semiconductors in the inverter,
the thermal sensor actuates the
protective circuit.
" Check the current in the drive
motor and examine the cause of
the overload, if any.
O Check for a proper setting of
the electrothermal relay in the
inverter. (Refer to ( 8) )
O
Check the cooling fan of the
inverter, the ambient
temperature, etc.
5. Inverter
( 5) , ( 6) DECEL ..... De c e l e r a t i on t i me s e t t i n g
A s wi t ch i s used t o s e t t h e d e c e l e r a t i o n t i me of t he d r i v e mot or. The
s e t t i n g method i s t h e same as t h a t of t he a c c e l e r a t i on t i me s e t t i n g .
Se t t h e de c e l e r a t i on t i me of t h i s machine t o 5 seconds. With t h e s wi t ch
( 5) a t t h e n e u t r a l ( XI ) , s e t t he d i a l (4) t o "5".
( 7) Speed c ont r ol vol t a ge change-over s wi t ch
Be s ur e t o s e t t h i s s wi t ch downward ( 5V) on t h i s machine. I f it i s s e t
upward (IOV), t h e d r i v e mot or speed wi l l be reduced by one h a l f t h e
normal speed.
(8) TH ..... Var i abl e r e s i s t o r f o r t h e e l e c t r ot he r ma l r e l a y s e t t i n g
Thi s i n v e r t e r c ont a i ns an e l e c t r ot he r ma l r e l a y. The s e t t i n g va l ue i s
adj us t ed wi t h t h i s v a r i a b l e r e s i s t o r .
Be s ur e t o s e t t h e v a r i a b l e r e s i s t o r t o i t s 100% p o s i t i o n a s t h e mot or
(1.5kW) f o r t h i s machine i s dr i ve n by a 1.5kW i n v e r t e r .
Never t u r n t h e v a r i a b l e r e s i s t o r f u l l y cl ockwi se a s t he e l e c t r ot he r ma l
r e l a y wi l l mal f unct i on.
(9) Changing t h e maximum out put f r equency
A f r equency from 6Hz t o 120Hz can be used on t h i s machine by connect i ng
t h e jumper wi r e a t t h e c e nt e r . For t h e Ryobi 500K and t h e 500K-NP t he
f r equency i s from 6Hz t o 60Hz. When r e pl a c i ng t h e p a r t , p l e a s e be s ur e
t h a t t he jumper wi r es a r e c o r r e c t l y mounted.
For t h e Ryobi 3302M For t h e Ryobi 500K
and I t e k 3985
and 500K-NP 1
5. Inverter
(10) The adj ust ment of t h e aut omat i c t or que boos t
Thi s f unc t i ons t o a ut oma t i c a l l y c or r e c t t he out put vol t a ge dependi ng on
t h e l oad t o improve t h e motor t or que. The c or r e c t i on volume of t h e
out put vol t a ge can be adj us t ed by t he t or que boost adj ust ment volume
( v R ~ ) . The l oc a t i on of t h i s VR2 i s al most i n t h e c e nt e r of t h e pr i nt e d
c i r c u i t board and can be a dj us t e d a f t e r removing t h e i n v e r t e r cover
( f i xed wi t h two scr ews) . The r e l a t i o n s h i p between t h e VR2 adj ust ment
p o s i t i o n and t h e VR2 vol t a ge c or r e c t i on volume i s shown i n t h e l i s t
below.
" Lengt h ( a)
When t h e aut omat i c t or que boost does
not a c t ua t e . Ther ef or e, t h e out put
vol t a ge wi l l remai n f i xed r e ga r dl e s s of
t h e l oad.
" Lengt h ( b) , ( c)
The aut omat i c t or que boost a c t ua t e s .
When t h e more t h e VR2 i s t ur ned i n t h e
cl ockwi se d i r e c t i o n , t h e out put vol t a ge
wi l l be i ncr eas ed. However, a t t h e
l e ngt h ( c ) , d e s p i t e t h e adj ust ment
p o s i t i o n , t h e out put v o l t a g e w i l l s t a y
t h e same a s t h e "7.5" p o s i t i o n on t h e
s c a l e .
When t h e aut omat i c t or que boost i s g r e a t l y i nc r e a s e d, i t may cause t oo
hi gh a vol t a ge t o be s uppl i e d, which wi l l a c t u a t e t he p r o t e c t i v e c i r c u i t
t o pr ot e c t t h e i n v e r t e r , s o pl e a s e be c a r e f ul .
The VR2 has been a dj us t e d t o t he p o s i t i o n shown i n t h e i l l u s t r a t i o n a t
t h e f a c t or y.
5. Inverter
(4) Inverter adjustment (For the machines after #1132)
1) Setting panel
I POWER OCT OVT I PF THT OL
i ACCEL DECEL
@Power ..... ( 1) Power lamp
When a 3 phase or a single phase power source is supplied to the
inverter, this LED lights up.
eOCT, OVT, IPF, THT, OL ..... ( 2) Warning lamps
The inverter incorporates the self-protection function against
the overcurrent and the overvoltage. When it actuates, the lamp
lights and the drive motor stops. For more information of the
OCT, OVT, IFF, THT, OL, please see the pages 27, 28 and 29.
A C C E L ..... (3), (4) Acceleration time setting
A switch is used to set the acceleration time of the drive motor.
The multiplying factor is set with the switch (3) and the time
with the dial (4). Set the acceleration time to 5 seconds. With
the switch (3) at the neutral (XI), set the dial (4) to "5".
eDECEL ..... (5), (6) ~eceleration time setting
A switch is used to set the deceleration time of the drive motor.
The multiplying factor is set with the switch (5) and the time
with the dial (6). Set the deceleration time to 5 seconds. With
the switch (5) at the neutral (XI), set the dial (6) to "5".
5. Inverter
@ TH ..... ( 7 ) Vari abl e r e s i s t o r f o r t he el ect r ot her mal r el ay
s e t t i n g
Thi s i nver t er cont ai ns an el ect r ot her mal r el ay. The s e t t i n g
val ue i s adj ust ed wi t h t h i s var i abl e r e s i s t o r .
Be sur e t o s e t t he var i abl e r e s i s t o r t o i t s 100Z pos i t i on. Never
t ur n t he var i abl e r e s i s t o r f u l l y clockwise as t he el ect r ot her mal
r el ay w i l l mal funct i on.
Frequency s e t t i n g
The frequency s e t t i n g swi t ch i s
used t o s e t t he maximum frequency.
(Maximum frequency ( f max) i s
120Hz) when t he i nve r t e r i s ship-
ped as a replacement p a r t , t he
swi t ch i s s e t a t 60Hz, s o be s ur e
t h a t t he swi t ch i s s e t t o match
t he machine i t i s mounted on.
NB: Do not touch t he ot her swi t ches
SW 1-1 ... ON
SW 1-2 ... OFF
SW1
$ $
a
. .
0 0 2 s
N -3
Fri
- C\] P P " , - Z % >
I u
f max V /F bend
3 ) Other s e t t i n g volumes.
s Automatic t orque boost adj ust -
ment volume (A/BST) . . . . . ( 1 )
Thi s f unct i ons t o aut omat i cal l y
cor r ect t he out put vol t age de-
pending on t he load t o improve
t he motor t orque. The volume
i s s e t a t t he 12 o' cl ock posi -
t i on.
Do not t ouch t h i s volume.
A/BsT M/BST VRT
VRH VRM VRL
@ Manual t or que boost adj ust ment volume (M/BsT) . . . . . (2)
A cl ockwi se t ur n i nc r e a s e s t he mot or t or que. When t he volume i s
g r e a t l y i nc r e a s e d, v i b r a t i o n and noi s e may i nc r e a s e and t he
e l e c t r i c t her mal r e l a y (THT) o r over cur r ent t r i p (OCT) may be
a c t i va t e d dur i ng t he low-frequency oper at i on. The volume i s s e t
a t t he 1 2 o' cl ock pos i t i on when adj us t ed a t t h e f a c t or y. Adj ust
t h i s volume onl y when t h e mot or t or que i s i n s u f f i c i e n t .
NB: The ot he r volumes a r e s e t a s shown i n t he i l l u s t r a t i o n . Do
not t ouch t he ot he r volumes.
4) PWM mode s e l e c t i o n d i a l
Thi s d i a l can change t h e motor noi s e and sound, and
t h e r es onant poi nt of t h e v i b r a t i o n . Thi s volume i s
us ua l l y s e t a t "0". Adj ust t h i s d i a l when t he gear
noi s e problem occur s .
NB: The "0" pos i t i on i s t h e s t andar d s e t t i n g posi -
t i o n .
5. Inverter
[ ~ e f er ence]
OCT, OVT, I PF, THT, OL ..... ( 2 ) , ( 7 ) Warning lamps
Pr o t e c t i v e f unc t i ons a r e i ncor por at ed t o p r o t e c t t h e i n v e r t e r from
over cur r ent and over vol t age. When t he p r o t e c t i v e f unc t i on i s a c t i v a t e d , t h e
mot or comes t o a s t o p a f t e r f r e e r unni ng. To r e s t a r t t h e mot or , i t i s
neces s ar y t o push t h e machine s t op but t on o r t o per f or m r e s e t by p u t t i n g on
t he i nput power sour ce a f t e r s h u t t i n g i t o f f .
Over cur r ent
s t a l l
pr event i on
Regenera-
t i v e
over vol t age
s t a l l
Problem and cause
When c ur r e nt of 150% or more of
i n v e r t e r r a t e d c ur r e nt f l ows i n
t h e mot or dur i ng t h e a c c e l e r a t i on
of mot or by t he i n v e r t e r , t h i s
f unc t i on s t ops t he r i s e of
f r equency u n t i l l oad c ur r e nt
r educes t o pr event t he i n v e r t e r
from r e s u l t i n g i n ove r c ur r e nt
t r i p . Al so, when ove r c ur r e nt of
150% o r more of r a t e d c ur r e nt
fl ows dur i ng s t eady ( const ant -
speed) ope r a t i on, t h i s f unc t i on
r educes f r equency u n t i l l oad
c ur r e nt r educes t o pr event t he
i n v e r t e r from r e s u l t i n g i n
over cur r ent t r i p . When l oad
c ur r e nt has reduced below 150%,
t h i s f unc t i on i nc r e a s e s f r equency
agai n and per mi t a c c e l e r a t i o n t o
be cont i nued up t o p r e s e t
f r equency.
When t he out put vol t a ge of con-
v e r t e r r i s e s t o over t h e pr e-
det er mi ned va l ue by r e ge ne r a t i ve
ener gy dur i ng d e c e l e r a t i o n of
t he mot or , t h i s f unc t i on s t ops
t h e f a l l of f r equency u n t i l t h e
vol t a ge of t h e c a pa c i t or ( a c r os s
t e r mi na l s P and N) r educes t o
l e s s t han t h e pr edet er mi ned
va l ue i n or de r t o pr event t h e
i n v e r t e r from r e s u l t i n g i n
over vol t age t r i p , As soon a s
r e ge ne r a t i ve ener gy has r educed,
t h i s f unc t i on de c r e a s e s
f r equency agai n t o a l l ow
de c e l e r a t i on t o be cont i nued.
Act i ons t o be t aken
lamp f l i c k e r s .
lamp f l i c k e r s .
5. Inverter
Over cur r ent
shut of f
(0 CT
Regenera-
t i v e
over vol t age
s hut o f f
(OV'I')
I ns t ant ane-
ous power
f a i l u r e
pr ot e c t i on
(IFF)
Power
s our ce
under-
vol t a ge
pr ot e c t i on
(IPF)
b
Problem and cause
Thi s f unc t i on d e t e c t s t he DC
c ur r e nt of conver t er . When
over cur r ent of 200% o r more of
i n v e r t e r r a t e d out put c ur r e nt
oc c ur s , p r o t e c t i v e c i r c u i t i s
a c t i va t e d t o s t op t h e i n v e r t e r .
When conver t er out put over vol t age
i s caused by r e ge ne r a t i ve ener gy
from t he mot or , p r o t e c t i v e c i r -
c u i t i s a c t i va t e d t o s t op t he
out put of t r a n s i s t o r and keep it
st opped.
When i ns t ant aneous power f a i l u r e
occur s f o r 15m s e c o r l onger
( t h i s a ppl i e s a l s o t o t h e s hut
o f f i n v e r t e r i nput power s our c e ) ,
i ns t ant aneous power f a i l u r e
p r o t e c t i v e f unc t i on i s a c t i va t e d
t o s t op t h e out put of i n v e r t e r
and keep i t st opped. I n t h e
cas e of l i g h t l oad, normal ope-
r a t i o n can be cont i nued up t o
appr oxi mat el y 100m s ec, al t hough
i t depends on l oads . When power
f a i l u r e cont i nues about 10-20
s ec, t h e e r r o r al arm i s r e s t or e d
t o r e s e t s t a t e due t o t he l o s s
of power. When t he power i s
r e s t or e d 100m s e c o r l a t e r , t he
p r o t e c t i v e f unc t i on i s aut omat i -
c a l l y r e s e t . (When t he power
f a i l u r e has occur r ed wi t hi n 15m
s e c , o r i n t he c a s e of l i g h t
l oad, when t he power f a i l u r e has
occur r ed f o r about l OOm s e c ,
normal ope r a t i on i s performed. )
When t he l i n e vol t a ge of i n v e r t e r
i s r educed, t h e c ont r ol c i r c u i t
cannot pr ovi de normal f unc t i ons
and mal f unct i ons r e s u l t , such a s
he a t gener at i on of t he mot or and
i n s u f f i c i e n t t or que. Ther ef or e,
when t he l i n e vol t a ge i s reduced
t o l e s s t han 150V, t h e p r o t e c t i v e
c i r c u i t i s a c t i va t e d t o s t op t h e
out put of t r a n s i s t o r and keep i t
st opped.
Act i ons t o be t aken
TZ'FF'] lamp i s l i t .
( Pos s i bl e causes of OCT a r e s h o r t
on t he i n v e r t e r out put s i d e ,
ground f a u l t , e xc e s s i ve l oa d,
ext r emel y s h o r t s e t t i n g of accel -
e r a t i o n t i me, s t a r t dur i ng f r e e
r unni ng of mot or , mot or l a r g e r
t han i n v e r t e r r a t i n g , s t a r t of
s p e c i a l mot or , e t c . Ther ef or e,
r e s t o r e t h e c i r c u i t a f t e r f u l l y
esami ni ng t h e cause of t r oubl e . )
lamp i s l i t .
( cause of OVT i ncl ude s hor t set -
t i n g of d e c e l e r a t i o n t i me. )
-
/TPF1 lamp i s l i t .
/IPFI lamp i s l i t .
( Li ne vol t a ge t ends t o r educe when
t h e c a pa c i t y of power s our ce i s
i n s u f f i c i e n t or anot her machine
wi t h a l ar ge- capaci t y mot or con-
nect ed t o t he same c i r c u i t i s
s t a r t e d . Check t he power s our ce
syst em. )
5. Inverter
Overload
shut of f
( El ect r oni c
t herma 1
r e l a y)
(THT)
Overload
al arm
(OL )
Fi n
over heat
pr ot e c t i on
(OVTJTHT)
Sel f -
di a gnos i s
t r i p
(OCTJTEFT)
Problem and cause
El e c t r oni c t her mal r e l a y d e t e c t s
over l oad of mot or dur i ng opera-
t i o n i n r a t e d condi t i ons o r motor
over heat i ng i n low-speed opera-
t i o n and pr ot e c t i ve c i r c u i t i s
a c t i va t e d t o s t op and pr ot e c t t he
i n v e r t e r out put . When a s p e c i a l
motor o r 2 o r more mot or s a r e
oper at ed, t h e mot or cannot be
pr ot e c t e d by t h e e l e c t r o n i c
t her mal r e l a y. Pr ovi de a
t her mal r e l a y on t h e out put s i d e .
of i nve r t e r . I n t h i s c a s e , i f
t he e l e c t r o n i c t her mal r e l a y i s
s e t t o OFF p o s i t i o n , onl y t he
t r a n s i s t o r pr ot e c t i on i s
a c t i va t e d.
Whenmot or i s over l oaded and
i n v e r t e r out put c ur r e nt exceed
150% of r a t e d c ur r e nt , t he over -
load al ar m (OL) lamp i s l i t .
When t he c ur r e nt i s reduced t o
l e s s t han 150%, t h e lamp i s
t ur ned o f f . Si nce t h e OL lamp
d e t e c t s and i ndi c a t e s an
over l oad s t a t e be f or e t r i p p i n g
occur s by over cur r ent o r
over vol t age, i t a c t s a s an e r r o r
alarm.
The i n v e r t e r per f or ms f or ced
cool i ng wi t h bui l t - i n f a n. When
t he cool i ng f i n of semi-conductor
i s over heat ed due t o t he f a i l u r e
of f an, t emper at ur e s ens or i s
a c t i va t e d t o s t op t he i n v e r t e r
out put and keep i t st opped.
Thi s f unc t i on moni t or s i f t he
CPU f o r c ont r ol i n s i d e t he i n-
v e r t e r i s always ope r a t i ng nor-
mal l y. Si nce c ont r ol e r r o r
r e s u l t s i n mot or ove r c ur r e nt and
i n s u f f i c i e n t t or que, t h e pr ot ec-
t i v e c i r c u i t i s a c t i va t e d t o
p r o t e c t t he i n v e r t e r . Thi s fun-
c t i o n i s a l s o a c t i va t e d when
mi s oper at i on, such a s t he s e t t i n g
change of t he maximun out put
f r equency, occur s dur i ng opera-
t i on.
Act i ons t o be t aken
lamp i s lit.
(Examine t he cause or over l oad,
and l i g h t e n l oad, change opera-
t i o n pa t t e r n, o r r econs i der
i n v e r t e r and mot or c a pa c i t i e s . )
lamp f l i c k e r s .
( I f t h e OL lamp f l i c k e r s dur i ng
a c c e l e r a t i on o r de c e l e r a t i on, s e t
t h e a c c e l e r a t i on o r de c e l e r a t i on
t i me l onger . I f i t i s a c t i va t e d
dur i ng const ant - speed ope r a t i on,
l i ght e n l oad o r r e c ons i de r i n-
v e r t e r and mot or c a pa c i t i e s . )
and [THTI lamps a r e lit a t
t h e same t i me. (Check cool i ng f i n
and ambient t emper at ur e and a l s o
check f o r obs t a c l e i n t he way of
a i r . )
[OCT! and lamps a r e lit a t
t h e same t i me. (The c ont r ol c i r -
c u i t may have mal f unct i oned due t o
e x t e r n a l noi s e , from anot her
machine e t c . Perform r e s e t and
check condi t i ons . I f t h i s occur s
f r e que nt l y, f u l l y check i f noi s e
has ent er ed pe r i phe r a l c i r c u i t . )
6. lnverter control board
6. Inverter control board
The i n v e r t e r c ont r ol board sends t h e normal r o t a t i o n , r e ve r s e r o t a t i o n ,
s t op, i nchi ng, and t h e speed s e t t i n g s i g n a l s t o t h e i n v e r t e r based on t h e
s i g n a l from t h e CPU boar d.
(1) Normal r o t a t i o n and r e ve r s e r o t a t i o n s i g n a l s
When t h e R10 t ur ns ON, t h e d r i v e motor wi l l r o t a t e nor mal l y and when t h e R11
t u r n s ON, t he d r i v e motor wi l l r o t a t e r e ve r s e l y. Check t he movement of t he
R10 and t he R11 by us i ng t h e LD5 and t h e LD6.
R11 STR
Lg ,, L m& TI
S P O 1 2 3
@@@@
L D I LD2 LD3 L D4
SP- S P S
l NCH BOTTOM TO P
0 0
BO- d&
V R I 0 V R I I V R1 2 -
wk -- 8 ~ 4
( 2) Speed adj ust ment
a ) 1, 000r ph and i nc hi ng speed
The 1, 000r ph speed and t h e i nchi ng speed adj ust ment i s done by us i ng t h e
VR10. When t ur ni ng t h e VRlO i n t h e cl ockwi se d i r e c t i o n , t h e speed wi l l
be i ncr eas ed and when t ur ni ng it i n t h e count er cl ockwi se d i r e c t i o n , t h e
speed wi l l be r educed.
b) 3, 000r ph
The 3, 000r ph speed adj ust ment i s done by us i ng t h e VR11. When t ur ni ng
t h e VRll i n t h e cl ockwi se d i r e c t i o n , t h e speed w i l l be i ncr eas ed and when
t ur ni ng i t i n t h e count er cl ockwi se d i r e c t i o n , t h e speed w i l l be reduced.
6. Inverter control board
c ) 10, 000rph
The 10, 000rph speed adj ust ment i s done by us i ng t h e VR12. When t ur ni ng
t h e VR12 i n t h e cl ockwi se d i r e c t i o n , t h e speed wi l l be i ncr eas ed and when
t ur ni ng it i n t h e count er cl ockwi se d i r e c t i o n , t h e speed wi l l be r educed.
(3) The speed s e t t i n g c i r c u i t checki ng pr ocedur es
The i n v e r t e r c ont r ol board conver t s t h e 4 b i t d i g i t a l s i g n a l from t h e CPU t o
t h e vol t a ge s i g n a l , and sends t h i s vol t a ge s i g n a l t o t h e i n v e r t e r a s t h e
speed s e t t i n g s i gna l . The d i g i t a l s i g n a l from t h e CPU i s checked by t h e LDI
t hr ough t h e LD4. The vol t a ge s i g n a l t o t h e i n v e r t e r can be measured by t h e
d i r e c t c i r c u i t vol t a ge r ange t e s t e r by us i ng t h e check pi ns SP- and SF+. It
shows t he r e l a t i o n s h i p between t h e machine r o t a t i o n speed and t h e d i g i t a l
s i g n a l from t h e CPU board and t h e vol t a ge s i g n a l t o t h e i n v e r t e r below.
( ~ o t e ) x ..... Li ght of f o ..... Li ght up
Machine r o t a t i o n
speed
1000rph and when the
machine is stopped
3000rph
3500rph
4000rph
4500rph
5000rph
5500rph
6000rph
6500rph
7000rph
7500rph
8000rph
8500rph
9000rph
9500rph
10000rph
Vol t age between
SP- and SP+
0.5V
1 .4V
1.7V
1.9V
2.1V
2.4V
2.6V
2.8V
3.1V
3.3V
3.5V
3.8V
4.0V
4.2V
4.5V
4.7V
Di g i t a l
LD1
X
o
x
o
x
o
x
o
x
o
x
o
x
o
x
o
boar d
LD4
X
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
s i g n a l
LD2
x
x
o
o
x
x
o
o
x
x
o
o
x
x
o
o
from t h e CPU
LD3
x
x
x
x
o
o
o
o
x
x
x
x
o
o
o
o
7. lnput circuit of the connector board illustration
7. Input circuit of the connector board illustration
( 1) The i n t e r r u p t i n g i nput system
The phot o coupl er For t h i s machine, t h e r e a r e 6 t ypes of
on t h e CPU board
TRANSFER pHlw
DRUM
Pi n No.
i n t e r r u p t i n g i nput syst em s i gna l s a s
shown below.
a m' Connector No.
a ) I RO . . . PH3
Connected t o t he f i r s t u n i t bl anket
jam s ens or (PH3)
N
-
b) IR1 . . . CS3 OFF
Connected t o t h e t i mi ng s wi t ch
(CS3). \?hen t he CS3 t ur ns OFF, t h e
I R1 a c t ua t e s .
---.
O N N 0 - N
m m m m m m
- - - - - -
TO THE OUTPUT
4 1
CI RCUI T DIAGRAM
1; ;
N - - -
> g o
N r n Z
+ U U
c ) IR2, IR4 ... CS4
Connected t o t he t i mi ng s wi t ch
(CS4). When t he CS4 t ur ns OFF, t h e
IR2 a c t ua t e s and when t h e CS4 t ur ns
ON t h e IR4 a c t ua t e s .
d) IR3
Connected t o t he out put l i n e from
t h e CPU boar d. Thi s s i g n a l i s used
t o s e t t he pr e s e t number of s he e t s
on t h e s heet count er . When
cont i nuousl y pushi ng t h e s e t but t on
on t h e s he e t count er t h e IR3
a c t ua t e s .
N
e ) IR5 ... PH2
Connected t o t h e second u n i t
bl anket jam sensor (PH2) .
I
N
The CPU board r e c e i ve s t he s e i n t e r r u p t i n g i nput s i gna l s from t he phot o
coupl er . The phot o coupl er conver t s t h e e l e c t r o s i g n a l t o t h e phot o s i g n a l
and a l s o changes t h e phot o s i g n a l t o t h e e l e c t r o s i gna l .
I
N
- - -
>o n
".nZ
- C u m
N
i -
and Pin No.
7. Input circuit of the connector board illustration
( 2) The ma t r i x syst em i nput
Dat a l i n e i nput
phot o coupl er To t h e CPU board From t h e CPU board
\ d a t a l i n e s e l e c t l i n e
I nput checki ng
con£ i r mat i on LED
t h a t a r e r e l a t e d t o t h e s e l e c t
l i n e L1 from t h e i nput c i r c u i t
diagram (Page 135), i t w i l l l ook
l i k e t h e i l l u s t r a t i o n on t he
l e f t . The CPU board out put s t h e
s i g n a l t h a t s e l e c t s each l i n e
Connector No.
from t h e phot o coupl er . I n t h e
i l l u s t r a t i o n on t he l e f t , when
Connector No. t h e phot o coupl er t h a t s e l e c t e d
t h e L1 on t he CPU board t ur ns ON,
L" 1"
-.,-
\
t h e bas e t o t h e t r a n s i s t o r TR14
The connect i on of t h i s p a r t show w i l l be HI GH and t h e e l e c t r i c
by us i ng anot her method below.
c ur r e nt w i l l f l ow from t he TR14
D4 D 3 02 D l
c o l l e c t o r and t he e mi t t e r and t h e
checki ng LED LD6 w i l l l i g h t up.
When s h i f t i n g t h e SW1 t o t he TEST
s i d e and t ur ni ng t h e DS4-1 ON,
t h e same t hi ng w i l l occur .
7. Input circuit of the connector board illustration
/ DO i nput phot o coupl er
-
liI
L1 s e l e c t phot o coupl er
-
24V 24V
D S 4 - I RUN
L D 6
c ur r e nt wi l l f l ow i n t h e d i r e c t i o n
of t h e ar r ow i n t h e i l l u s t r a t i o n
on t h e l e f t and t h e phot o coupl er
t h a t i nput s t h e DO on t h e CPU
board t u r n ON. Then t h e CPU i s
confi rmed t h a t LS 1 t u r n s ON. A t
t h i s t i me, t h e checki ng LED LD17
w i l l l i g h t up. The L2 t hr ough t h e
L11 f unc t i on t h e same a s t h e L1.
However, t h e L5 t hr ough t h e L8 a r e
p a r t of t he ma t r i x c i r c u i t i n t h e
mai n c o n t r o l pa ne l c i r c u i t boar d,
t h e r e f o r e s e e t h e main c ont r ol
panel c i r c u i t board di agr am (Page
147) .
8. The input circuit checkina Drocedure
F C 5
I RO
8. The input circuit checking procedure
(1 ) The i nt er r upt i ng i nput system checking procedure
For checking t he i nt er r upt i ng i nput system,
t he LD1 t hrough t he LD5 and t he LD35 on t he
I R I
I R 2
I R 3
I R 4
I R 5
LD
a) IRO . . . LDI
When t he f i r s t uni t bl anket jam sensor
(PH3) de t e c t s a s heet of paper, t he LDI
w i l l l i g h t .
r i ght s i de of t he connect or board ar e used.
b) I R1 ... LD2
When t he t i mi ng swi t ch CS3 t ur ns OFF, t he
LD2 Li ght s and when t he CS3 t ur ns ON, t he
LD2 l i g h t goes o f f .
c) IR2 ... LD3
When t he t i mi ng swi t ch CS4 t ur ns OFF, t he
LD3 l i g h t s and when t he CS4 t ur ns ON, t he
LD3 l i g h t goes o f f .
d) IR3 ... LD4
The IR3 i s t he s i gnal connected t o t he out put of t he CPU board t ha t i s
used t o s e t t he pr es et number of s heet s on t he sheet count er by pushing
t he sheet count er s e t but t ons cont i nuousl y. Usual l y t he LD4 l i g h t s , but
when pushing t he sheet count er s e t but t ons, t he l i g h t w i l l go of f .
e ) I R4 ... LD5
When t he t i mi ng swi t ch CS4 t ur ns ON, t he LD5 w i l l l i g h t , and when t he
CS4 t ur ns OFF, t he LD5 w i l l go of f . (The opposi t e of t he IR2)
f ) IR5 ... LD35
When t he second uni t bl anket jam sensor (PH2) det ect s a s heet of paper,
t he LD35 w i l l l i ght . Thi s LD35 i s not mounted on t he machines wi t h t he
s e r i a l numbers from 1001 t o 1005.
( ~ o t e ) The i nt er r upt i ng i nput system, can be checked by t he i nput check-
i ng program too. Pl ease s ee t he i nput checking program (Page 44).
8. The input circuit checking procedure
(2) Mat ri x system i nput checking procedure
The i nput by t he mat r i x system cannot be checked duri ng t he machine
operat i on because t he one i nput l i n e i s connected t o s ever al swi t ches. The
i nput checking by t he mat r i x system i s done by fol l owi ng t he procedures.
Pl ease r e f e r t o t he mat r i x char t (on t he back of t he cont r ol box cover and
Page 153).
TEST
RUN
a) Procedure
1) Set t he machine power OFF and remove t he f l a t cabl e connector FC6.
2) Shi f t t he swi t ch SW1 t o t he TEST s i de.
3) Sel ect t he s e l e c t l i n e of t he swi t ch t o be checked by t he DS4 and t he
DS5. When t he DS4 o r t he DS5 swi t ch f or t he s e l e c t l i n e t o be checked
i s ON, t h a t l i n e w i l l be checked. Only one s e l e c t l i n e can be checked
a t a time.
4) Turn on t he machine.
b) Checking
1) The s e l e c t l i n e t ha t i s sel ect ed i s shown by t he LD6 through t he LD16.
2) The ON and OFF condi t i on of t he swi t ch which i s connected t o t he
s e l e c t l i n e and t he dat a l i n e (DO - D7) i s shown by t he LD17 through
t he LD24.
8. The input circuit checking procedure
c) Examples of t h e checki ng pr ocedur e
The checki ng of t h e LS1 t hr ough t h e LS5 ope r a t i on t h a t i nput s t h e f i r s t
u n i t ope r a t i ng l e ve r pos i t i on.
1) By f ol l owi ng t h e pr ocedur es gi ven on t h e pr evi ous page, s e l e c t t he
s e l e c t l i n e ( LI ) .
2) Check t h a t onl y t h e LD6 l i g h t s up from t h e LD6 t hr ough t h e LD16.
3) The checki ng of t h e LS1 t hr ough t h e LS5 ope r a t i on i s done by us i ng t h e
LD17 t hr ough t h e LD24.
..... Lever pos i t i on I ...... LS1 ON LD17 l i g h t s up
Lever p o s i t i o n I1 ..... LS2 ON ..... LD18 l i g h t s up
Le v e r p o s i t i o n 1 1 1 .... LS3 ON ..... LD1 9 l i g h t s u p
Lever pos i t i on I V ..... LS4 ON ..... LD20 l i g h t s up
Lever p o s i t i o n V ...... LS5 ON ..... LD21 l i g h t s up
Usual l y when each i nput s wi t ch i s ON, t h e LD17 t hr ough LD21 l i g h t up, but
pl e a s e be c a r e f u l because t he r e a r e some except i ons .
" SS5 - SS8 (Jam ON/OFF swi t ch)
When t h e s wi t ch i s s e t a t t h e OFF p o s i t i o n , t h e LED l i g h t s .
" PHI, PH4 (Phot o s ens or )
When t h e r e i s a s heet of paper over t h e s e ns or , t h e LED l i g h t s .
" PB50, LS52 - LS66 ( Saf et y swi t ch)
The s wi t ch t ur ns ON, when a s a f e t y cover i s opened, t he LED goes o f f .
Ther ef or e when t h e i nput checki ng i s done, i f t h e LED i s not lit, t h e
machine cannot be r un.
d) When ope r a t i ng t h e machine a f t e r t h e checki ng pr ocedur e
Af t er checki ng, mount t h e FC6 a f t e r t h e power i s OFF and t u r n of f a l l t h e
DS4 and t he DS5 s wi t ches , t hen s e t t h e SW1 t o t h e RUN s i de .
(Note) The ma t r i x i nput syst em, can be checked by t h e i nput checki ng
program t oo. Pl e a s e s e e t h e i nput checki ng program (Page 44) .
(3) The i nput checking program
Thi s machine has i nput checking programs. Using t h i s program, each i nput
condi t i on t o t he CPU can be checked e a s i l y.
a) Procedures
To ent er t he i nput checking program, keep pushi ng t he second u n i t normal
r ot a t i on i nchi ng but t on and t ur n on t he main power, and C-P-I (Checking
Program f o r t he I nput ) w i l l appear on t he sheet count er di s pl ay as shown
t he i l l u s t r a t i o n below.
b) onf firm at ion
Turn ON/OPF t he swi t ch t h a t you want t o check. The ON o r OFF swi t ch l i n e
number and t he da t a number a r e i ndi cat ed and t he buzzer sounds. When t h e
l i n e number and t he dat a number a r e i ndi cat ed and t he buzzer sounds, t h a t
swi t ch i nput t o t he CPU i s OK.
" Example of t he mat r i x system i nput
When t ur ni ng t he f i r s t uni t emergency s t op but t on (L5, DO) ON or OFF,
i t w i l l appear on t he sheet count er di s pl ay as shown t he i l l u s t r a t i o n
below.
8. The input circuit checking procedure
O Example of t he i nt er r upt i ng i nput system
When t ur ni ng t he second uni t bl anket jam sensor ( 1 ~ 5 ) ON, i t w i l l
appear on t he sheet count er di s pl ay as shown t he i l l u s t r a t i o n below.
c) Aft er t he i nput checking, when want i ng t o oper at e t he machine
Aft er t he i nput checking, t ur n t he main power swi t ch OFF once and t hen
t ur n t he power ON, and t he machine w i l l r e t ur n t o t he normal program.
9. Error indication
9. Error indication
Thi s machine has a program t ha t gi ves an e r r o r code when something unusual
occurs. The e r r o r code E-I t hrough E-5 w i l l appear on t he s heet count er
di s pl ay as shown t he i l l u s t r a t i o n below.
(1) E-1 code ..... The f i r s t uni t oper at i ng l ever
When something unusual occurs on t he swi t ches (LSI - LS5) t h a t i nput s t he
f i r s t uni t oper at i ng l ever pos i t i on, E-1 code w i l l appear.
The l i s t below shows t he problems:
a) A l l t he LS1 t hrough LS5 swi t ches a r e OFF when t he main power swi t ch i s
t urned ON.
b) More t han two of t he LS1 t hrough LS5 swi t ches a r e ON when t he main power
swi t ch i s t urned ON.
c) When more t han two of every ot her swi t ch ar e t urned ON.
(Example) The LS1 and t he LS3 swi t ches a r e ON.
d) When t he l ever i s s hi f t e d, t he l ever s ki ps t he next pos i t i on and i t i s
det ect ed.
(Example) The l ever s h i f t s from t he I pos i t i on t o t he 111 pos i t i on and it
i s det ect ed.
I n t he case of a) and b ) , i f t he LS1 t hrough t he LS5 swi t ches become normal,
t he E-I code di sappear s.
I n t he case of c) and d ) , t he E-I code w i l l not di sappear u n t i l t he power i s
t urned OFF.
(2) E-2 code ..... The second uni t oper at i ng l ever
When something unusual occurs on t he swi t ches ( ~ S 2 1 - ~ ~ 2 5 ) t ha t i nput s t he
second uni t oper at i ng l ever pos i t i on, t he E-2 code w i l l appear. Pl eas e
r e f e r t o t he E-1 code l i s t above as t he E-2 code i s t he same as t he E-1 code.
(3) E-3 code . . . . . CS3
When t he t i mi ng swi t ch CS3 i nput does not change a f t e r t he dr i ve motor
s t a r t s t o r o t a t e , t he E-3 code w i l l appear. Thi s code w i l l di sappear i f t he
CS3 i nput r et ur ns t o normal.
9. Error indication
(Note) When something unusual occurs on t he dr i ve motor out put c i r c u i t and
t he dr i ve motor does not r o t a t e , t he E-3 code w i l l appear.
(4) E-4 code . . . . . CS4
When t he t i mi ng swi t ch CS4 i nput does not change a f t e r t he dr i ve motor
s t a r t s t o r o t a t e , t he E-4 code wi l l appear. Thi s code w i l l di sappear i f t he
CS4 i nput r et ur ns t o normal.
(5) E-5 code . . . . . Mat ri x i nput
When something unusual occurs i n t he i nput c i r c u i t by t he mat r i x, t he E-5
code w i l l appear. I n t he i nput by t he mat r i x, when a l l of t he s e l e c t l i n e s
(L1 -- L11) ar e not s el ect ed, t he E-5 code wi l l appear even i f t her e i s onl y
one i nput on t he dat a l i n e (DO - D7). When t he E-5 code appears, t he dr i ve
motor cannot be r ot at ed. So when t he E-5 code appears, search f o r t he cause
by fol l owi ng t he next procedures.
(Note) I f t r oubl e occurs when t ur ni ng on t he power, t he C-P-I or C-P-0 may
be i ndi cat ed i nst ead of t he E-5 code.
a) When t r oubl e occurs a t t he dat a l i n e s i de on t he CPU board
Pul l of f t he f l a t cabl e connect or FC6 from t he connector board and t ur n
t he power ON. A t t h i s time i f t he E-I code appears, t he CPU board i s
normal. A t t h i s time i f t he E-5 code appears, t he t r oubl e i s wi t h t he
CPU board, s o r epl ace i t wi t h a new CPU board.
b) When t r oubl e occurs a t t he s e l e c t l i n e s i d e on t he CPU board
With t he out put checking program group 8 (See t he out put checking
program, page 57) , check t h a t t her e i s no t r oubl e wi t h t he s e l e c t l i nes .
I f any one of t he LD6 through LD16 ar e always l i t , i t i s unusual.
I f t hey ar e always lit up, p u l l of f t he f l a t cabl e connect or PC6. Then
i f a l l t hose L D l i g h t s go o f f , t he t r oubl e i s on t he CPU board, so
r epl ace it wi t h a new CPU board.
I f t he LED l i ght s do not go of f even a f t e r pul l i ng of f t he FC6, t he
t r oubl e i s on t he connect or board o r t he cord t o any out s i de swi t ch.
9.Error indication
c) When trouble occurs on the connector board or the cord to any outside
switch
When the trouble falls under a) and b), either the connector has trouble
or the cord to any outside switch is contacting the machine frame. In
this case, check by following the next procedures.
Pull off the flat cable connector FC6 on the connector board and turn the
power ON. At this time, check that either the select line checking LEDs
(LD6 -LD16) or the data line checking LEDs (LD17 - LD24) do not light.
If any one or all of them is lit, it is unusual. In this case, pull off
all of the connectors except the MC1 and the MC12 on the connector board.
When pulling off the connectors, if the light goes off on the LED that
was lit, this cord is contacting the machine frame.
If the LED is still lit even with only the MC1 and the MC12 connected,
pull off the MC12. At this time if the light goes off on the LED that
was lit, the feeder safety cover switch cord that connects the MC12 is
contacting the machine frame. If only the MC1 connected and the LED is
still lit, the trouble is on the connector board. Replace it with a new
connector board. The E-5 code will not disappear until the power is
turned OF F .
(~eference) The capacitance sensor for lowering the delivery table dolly
negative side wire (Wire No. 52) is contacting the sensor
body with resistance. Therefore if the switch input line is
contacting the machine frame, any one or all of the checking
LEDs (ID6 -- LD24) will light up.
10. Output circuit of the connector board illustration
10. Output circuit of the connector board illustration
The out put s i g n a l t o t h e connect or board from t h e CPU board i s s e nt t o t he
connect or board t hr ough t h e f l a t c a bl e connect or ( F C ~ ) .
(1) How t o r ead t he out put c i r c u i t i l l u s t r a t i o n
a) Sol enoi d c i r c u i t
Wire No.
Noi se
abs or ber
The magnet s wi t ch and t h e s ol enoi d
v o l t a g e a r e a l l AC115V. Noi se abs or ber s
a r e mounted on a l l of t he s e c i r c u i t s .
Y x : m E
r r r ~ C C I- Sol enoi d and
- 0
~t
P o a
0 2 % =
mot or name
0 z, k' 2
b) Rel ay c i r c u i t
The s i g n a l t h a t i s out put t e d from t h e CPU
board phot o coupl er pa s s e s t hr ough t h e FC8
Checking LED and i s i nput t e d i n t o t h e connect or boar d,
and a c t ua t e s t h e t r a n s i s t o r a r r a y t o ope-
r a t e t h e r e l a y. The t r a n s i s t o r a r r a y i s
Tr a ns i s t or
a r r a y No.
t he one t h a t has s e v e r a l t r a n s i s t o r s on one
I C . Ther ef or e when us i ng t he t r a n s i s t o r
pin No'
and changi ng t h e R5 c i r c u i t , it w i l l l ook
l i k e t h e i l l u s t r a t i o n below.
I W, 5 Eg
s 3~ 22
t; gz +-Relay name
5 OEi w
5 2 Z Z
z m 2-1 Z J
As shown i n t h e di agram on t h e r i g h t ,
when t h e HI GH s i g n a l i s s e n t t o t h e
number 1 p i n on t h e f l a t c a bl e connect or
(FC8) from t h e CPU boar d, t h e r e l a y R5
s t a r t s t o a c t ua t e .
p.ij,"
H I G H
(FC 8)
10. Output circuit of the connector board illustration
<Rel ay ope r a t i on checki ng pr ocedur e>
The ope r a t i on checki ng LEDs a r e mounted on a l l t he r e l a ys . Check t h e
r e l a y ope r a t i on us i ng t h e s e LEDs.
Checking LED
-
0 When t h e LED l i g h t s ,
t h e r e l a y i s ON
c ) Tr a ns i s t or out put
Checking LED
The f ol l owi ng out put s i g n a l s a r e out put t ed by
t h e t r a n s i s t o r from t he connect or boar d. For
t he s e out put s i g n a l s , t h e checki ng LEDs a r e
mounted on t h e connect or boar d. The out put
s i g n a l from t h e CPU i s checked by t he s e LEDs.
Edge of t h e connect i on
" LD32 (BZ2)
When t h e LD32 l i g h t s up, t h e main c o n t r o l panel buzzer BZ2 sounds.
" LD26 (Spray va l ve )
When t h e LD26 l i g h t s up, t h e s pr ay va l ve t ur ns ON.
" LD25 (Spray pump)
When t h e LD25 l i g h t s up, t h e s pr a y devi ce motor t u r n s ON.
10. Output circuit of the connector board illustraton
" LD27, LD28
The LD27 and t h e LD28 wi l l not l i g h t up on t h i s machine.
O LD29 ( Pr i nt count er )
When t he LD29 l i g h t s up, t he p r i n t count er w i l l add one.
" LD30 (Machine count er )
When t he LD30 l i g h t s up, t h e machine count er wi l l add one.
" LD34 (BZI)
When t he LD34 l i g h t s up, t h e buzzer BZ1 on t h e d e l i v e r y c o n t r o l panel
wi l l sound.
" LD33 (Count)
When t h e LD33 l i g h t s up, t h e t a pe i n s e r t e r count s i g n a l w i l l be
out put t e d.
" LD31 (Tape i n s e r t e r )
When t h e LD31 l i g h t s up, t h e t a pe i n s e r t e r out put s i g n a l wi l l be
out put t ed.
( 2) The machine count er and t h e p r i n t count er
The machine count er and t he p r i n t count er a r e powered by a ba t t e r y.
Ther ef or e even when t h e main power i s t ur ned o f f , t h e i n d i c a t o r i s
cont i nuous l y ON. The l i f e of t h i s b a t t e r y i s appr oxi mat el y seven ye a r s but
t h e b a t t e r y i t s e l f cannot be r e pl a c e d. When t h e b a t t e r y i s dead, t h e whole
count er must be r epl aced.
These count er s can work by connect i ng t h e
No.1 and t h e No.2 t e r mi na l s t oge t he r
wi t hout suppl yi ng vol t a ge from an o u t s i d e
s our ce. I f connect i ng t h e No.3 and t he
No.4 t e r mi na l s t oge t he r , t h e count er w i l l
be r e s e t t o 0.
11. Display control circuit
11. Display control circuit
With t h e s i g n a l from t h e CPU boar d, t h e d i s p l a y c ont r ol c i r c u i t c ont r ol s
t h e main c ont r ol panel LED i ndi c a t i on, a l l of t h e i nchi ng panel push but t on
s wi t ch lamps i n d i c a t i o n and a l l of t h e sub c ont r ol panel push but t on s wi t ch
lamps i ndi c a t i on. For t he LED l i g h t i n g syst em, t h e r e a r e two t ype s , t h e
s t a t i c l i g h t i n g syst em and t h e dynamic l i g h t i n g syst em.
" S t a t i c l i g h t i n g syst em
The s t a t i c l i g h t i n g syst em i s an or di na r y l i g h t i n g syst em and t h i s syst em
i s cont i nuousl y l i g h t s up t h e LEDs.
" Dynamic l i g h t i n g syst em
To t he human eye, t h e r e i s a f l i c k e r r esponse c h a r a c t e r i s t i c . When t he
f l i c k e r i n g f r equency r eaches a f i xe d r a t e , t he human eye cannot s e e t h e
f l i c k e r i n g and i t seems t h a t t h e l i g h t i s cont i nuous l y l i t .
The SW1 t hr ough SW8 go on i n
or de r r a pi dl y. As each
s wi t ch goes on, it l i g h t s i t s
LED. As t he swi t ches go on
r a p i d l y , t o t h e human eye i t
seems +. hat all the LEDs l i g h t
a t once.
On t h i s machi ne, t h e 8 LEDs l i g h t up i n or de r and i s done us i ng dynamic
l i g h t i n g . The human eye, can s e e a l l t h e 8 LEDs l i g h t up a t t h e same
t i me, however t hey l i g h t up one a t a t i me i n or de r . Thi s machi ne' s
d i s p l a y c ont r ol c i r c u i t us es t he 8 s t a t i c l i g h t i n g c i r c u i t s and t h e 16 x
8 dynamic l i g h t i n g c i r c u i t s .
11. Display control circuit
(1) S t a t i c l i g h t i n g c i r c u i t
The s t a t i c Li ght i ng c i r c u i t s a r e t h e TRI t hr ough TR8 i n t h e d i s p l a y c ont r ol
c i r c u i t out put s e c t i on di agram (Page 145) . When t h e TRI t hr ough TR8 t u r n
on, t h e PL1 t hr ough t h e LD4 l i g h t up a t t h e same t i me.
On t h e s t a t i c l i g h t i n g c i r c u i t , t h e checki ng LEDs (LDI -- LD8) a r e mounted on
t h e di s pl a y c o n t r o l c i r c u i t boar d, t h e r e f o r e pl e a s e check t h i s c i r c u i t board
us i ng t he s e LEDs.
" LDI ... PL1
When t h e LDI l i g h t s up, t h e f i r s t u n i t emergency s t o p but t on l i g h t s up.
O LD2 . , . PL2
When t h e LD2 l i g h t s up, t h e f i r s t u n i t ON/OFF lamp l i g h t s up.
" LD3
On t h i s machi ne, t h e LD3 does n o t l i g h t up.
" LD4 ... LD2, PL5
When t he checki ng LD4 l i g h t s up, t h e l u b r i c a t i o n war ni ng lamp on t h e main
c ont r ol panel and t h e l u b r i c a t i o n war ni ng r e s e t but t on lamp on t he sub
c ont r ol panel l i g h t up.
LD5 ... PL21
When t h e LD5 l i g h t s up, t h e second u n i t emergency s t o p but t on lamp l i g h t s
UP .
" LD6 .. . PL22
When t h e LD6 l i g h t s up, t he second u n i t ON/OFF lamp l i g h t s up.
" LD7
On t h i s machine, t h e LD7 does not l i g h t up.
" LD8 ... LD3, PL4
When t h e checki ng LD8 l i g h t s up, t h e pump f i l t e r c l e a ni ng war ni ng lamp on
t he main c ont r ol panel and t he pump f i l t e r c l e a ni ng war ni ng r e s e t but t on
lamp on t h e sub c ont r ol panel l i g h t up.
11. Display control circuit
(2) Dynamic l i g h t i n g c i r c u i t
The TR9 t hr ough t h e TR24 i n t h e d i s p l a y c ont r ol c i r c u i t out put s e c t i o n
di agram (Page 145) a r e t h e t r a n s i s t o r s f o r t h e dynamic l i g h t i n g d a t a out put .
Al so, t h e TR25 t hr ough t h e TR32 a r e t h e t r a n s i s t o r s f o r t he dynamic l i g h t i n g
l i n e out put . The TR25 t hr ough t h e TR32 t u r n on one a t a t i me from t h e TR25
ver y r a pi dl y.
The TR25 ( wi r e No. 351) i s connect ed t o t h e LD33 and t h e LD41 on t he main
c ont r ol panel (See t h e main c ont r ol panel c i r c u i t board di agr am, Page 128) .
When t h e TR25 i s ON, a t t h e same t i me t h e LD33 and t h e LD41 d a t a i s s e n t
from t h e TR9 t hr ough t h e TR24 (Wire No. 360 - 377) . A t t h i s moment, onl y
t h e LD33 and t h e LD41 l i g h t up. The next moment, t h e TR26 w i l l go on.
The TR26 (Wire No. 352) i s connect ed t o t h e LD34 and t h e LD42 on t h e mai n
c ont r ol panel . When t h e TR26 i s ON, a t t h e same t i me t h e LD34 and t h e LD42
d a t a i s s e nt from t he TR9 t hr ough t h e TR24 (Wire No. 360 - 377) . A t t h i s
moment, onl y t h e LD34 and t h e LD42 l i g h t up.
The TR27 t hr ough t he TR32 f unc t i on t h e same way. Ther ef or e, when t h e
dynamic l i g h t i n g c i r c u i t on t h e d i s p l a y c o n t r o l c i r c u i t board i s damaged,
a l l of t he LEDs t h a t a r e connect ed t o t h a t d a t a o r l i n e w i l l be a f f e c t e d.
I f a l l of t h e LEDs connect ed t o t h e d a t a and/ or l i n e do not l i g h t , r e pl a c e
t h e d i s p l a y c o n t r o l c i r c u i t boar d.
LD12 . LDl O LD5 LD7 LD9 L Dl l
P B l l PB13
(D 0
a P,
P. , g
co n,
'd $
i - - ' Y 0
(D rt
"g
0 rt
0 rt
rt 0
R 0
rt rt
o f i 3
r 3 r o
(D
n D
P. n 0
2 g s
s 2
rt n n, n rt
m 0
o o w
5
rt
d
' d d 0
P,
5 ; r t
rt e.
a
13. Output checking program
13. Output checking program
Thi s machine has out put checki ng programs. It i s used t o check t he
c i r c u i t s , f o r example t he s ol enoi d and t h e mot or. The out put checki ng
program on t h i s machine i s di vi de d i n t o 8 gr oups, t h e group 1 t hr ough group
8. So each s e c t i o n l i s t e d below can be checked i ndi vi dua l l y.
Group 1 - 4 ... Used f o r checki ng each i n d i c a t i o n on t h e main c ont r ol
panel .
Group 5 ....... Used f o r checki ng t h e s ol e noi ds , t h e pump mot or , and t h e
s pr a y devi ce on t h e ope r a t i on s i d e .
Group 6 ....... Used f o r checki ng t h e s ol e noi ds on t h e non ope r a t i on
s i de .
Group 7 ....... Used f o r checki ng t h e i n v e r t e r c o n t r o l c i r c u i t boar d.
Group 8 ....... Used f o r checki ng t h e i nput ma t r i x s e l e c t l i n e s and t h e
t a pe i n s e r t e r .
(1) Out put checki ng program pr ocedur es
a ) When i nput t i ng t h e out put checki ng program
To e n t e r t h e out put checki ng
(Check Program f o r Out put ) w i l l
appear on t h e s he e t count er upper
d i s p l a y and t h e group number wi l l be
I
shown on t h e s he e t count er lower
di s pl a y. Wi t h t h e power ON, t h e
group number 1 i s i ndi c a t e d and t h e
group 1 out put checki ng w i l l be
done.
Group number
13. Output checking program
b) To change t h e group number
--.
&en pushi ng any one of t h e s e h ;
out put checki ng program w i l l be
advanced. However dependi ng on t he
t i mi ng when pushi ng any one of t he
e group number]
e a t f i r s t , t he r e f or e
I
\
keep pushi ng t he but t on u n t i l t h e
\ group number changes.
c ) Output checki ng pr ocedur e
F i r s t s e l e c t t h e sol enoi d o r LED group number t h a t needs t o be checked.
The out put checki ng program wi l l be on t h e LED o r t h e s ol enoi d and check
each one i n or der . I f t h e LED o r t he s ol enoi d do not go on, check t h e
c i r c u i t by us i ng t h e out put c i r c u i t di agram.
d) When f i n i s h i n g t h e out put checki ng program
When f i n i s h i n g t he out put checki ng program, t u r n t h e main power swi t ch
OFF.
13. Output checking program
(2) Group 1
The second unit inching control panel and the speed indicator section on the
main control panel light up one at a time.
( 3) Group 2
The sheet counter section on
the main control panel
lights up in order shown in
the illustration on the
left.
13. Output checkina Droaram
( 4 ) Group 3
(5) Group 4
@ @ @ @
R.P.H.
@ @ @ @
The OK moni t or s e c t i on on
t h e main c o n t r o l panel
l i g h t s up i n or de r shown
i n t h e i l l u s t r a t i o n on t he
l e f t .
(Note)
Each r e s e t but t on lamp
on t h e sub c o n t r o l panel
l i g h t s up a t t he same
t i me when ( 2) and ( 3)
above a r e checked.
The upper i n d i c a t i o n s e c t i o n on t he mai n c o n t r o l panel and t h e i ndi c a t i on
s e c t i o n on t h e f i r s t u n i t i nchi ng c o n t r o l panel l i g h t up one a t a t i me.
13. Output checkina proaram
( 6) Group 5
1) The pump mot or w i l l t u r n ON.
2 ) The spr ay devi ce motor wi l l t u r n ON.
3) The s pr ay va l ve w i l l t u r n ON.
4) The f eed OFF s ol enoi d w i l l t u r n ON.
5) The f i r s t u n i t c yl i nde r ON s ol e noi d w i l l t u r n ON.
6) The second u n i t c yl i nde r ON s ol enoi d wi l l t u r n ON.
7) The de l i ve r y t a b l e d o l l y l ower i ng s ol enoi d wi l l t u r n ON.
8) The paper j a m buzzer wi l l sound.
13. Output checking program
(7) Group 6
The solenoids on the non operation side will turn ON in order shown in the
illustration above.
13. Output checking program
(8) Group 7 ( I nve r t e r c ont r ol c i r c u i t )
Rl l S T R
SPO 1 2 3
@@@@
L DI LD2 LD3 LD4
i
1
I
0-0
I N C H B OT T OM T O P
V Rl O V R l l V R12
SP- S P +
1 ) The R10 (STF) wi l l t u r n ON f o r a moment. The d r i v e motor wi l l not r o t a t e
because t he t i me t h a t i t i s ON i s t oo s hor t .
2) The R11 (STR) wi l l t u r n ON f o r a moment. The d r i v e mot or w i l l not r o t a t e
because t h e t i me t h a t i t i s ON i s t oo s hor t .
3 ) - 17)
The 3, 000rph t hr ough t h e 10, 000rph speed s e t t i n g i nc r e a s e s gr a dua l l y.
For t h e speed s e t t i n g s i g n a l checki ng pr ocedur es , s e e 6. The i n v e r t e r
c ont r ol boar d, (3) The speed s e t t i n g c i r c u i t checki ng pr ocedur e (page 37) .
13. Output checking program
(9) Group 8
TEST
n
1) - 1 1 )
Each i nput mat r i x s e l e c t l i n e from L1 t o L11 go on one a t a time. A t
t h i s t i me, t he dat a l i n e checking LED DO through D7 corresponds wi t h t he
s e l e c t l i ne.
12) The out put of t he t ape i n s e r t e r count s i gnal .
13) The out put of t he out put s i gnal t o t he t ape i n s e r t e r .
14. The terminals for optional accessories and DS2
14. The terminals for optional accessories and DS2
(1) Tape i n s e r t e r
a ) The j ob s e pa r a t i on t ype
Connect t h e connect or from t he t a pe
i n s e r t e r t o t he MC15 connect or onl y.
Power sour ce @
Power sour ce @
b) The p r e s e t number of copi es t ype
Job s e pa r a t i on Connect t he connect or from t he t a pe
i n s e r t e r t o t h e MC?5 connect or and
connect t he l i n e (63) t o t h e count
s i g n a l t e r mi na l .
(2) Feeder s a f e t y cover
(3) 24V t e r mi na l base
For t he machines t h a t t h e s a f e t y cover
i s mounted on t he f eeder s e c t i o n , do not
connect anyt hi ng t o t h e wi r e no. 190 and
no. 239 t a bs .
For t h e machines t h a t t h e s a f e t y cover i s
not mounted on t h e f eeder s e c t i on, t he
wi r e no.190 and no. 239 t a bs a r e connect ed
by a jumper wi r e t o each ot he r . I f t he r e
i s not a jumper l i n e , t he machine cannot
be r o t a t e d .
The out put of t h i s t er mi nal base i s
DC24V. When needi ng a DC24V power
s our ce, us e it. But do not us e i t over
t he maximum e l e c t r i c c ur r e nt of 18.
14. The terminals for optional accessories and DS2
When t he bl anket
cl eani ng devi ce
i s not mounted
When t he bl anket
cl eani ng devi ce
i s mounted
DS2
The CIS3 i s an ext r a i nput t ermi nal .
When connect i ng t he swi t ch poi nt of
cont act between t he wi res no.192 through
no.195 and t he wi re no.239, they ar e
i nput t ed t o each L9, D2 through D5.
However, t her e i s no program f o r t hese
i nput now. I f t he s peci f i cat i ons change
and i ncr ease t he i nput poi nt s , t hese wi l l
be used.
a) DS2-1
Thi s i s t he switch f or t he bl anket
cl eani ng devi ce (opt i on) i nput i f i t
i s mounted. I f t her e i s no bl anket
cl eani ng devi ce on t he machine, t ur n
t he DS2-1 OFF. And i f t her e i s a
bl anket cl eani ng devi ce on t he
machine, t ur n t he DS2-1 ON. Therefore
i f t he bl anket cl eani ng devi ce i s
mounted l a t e r , t ur n t h i s DS2-1 ON.
b) DS2-2
Thi s switch i s an ext r a one. Although
it does not have any e f f e c t when
moving i t t o e i t h e r s i de.
15. The CS3 and CS4 timing switches
15. The GS3 and CS4 timing switches
(1) The CS3 and CS4 s e t t i n g procedures
The CS3 and CS4 act uat i on confi rmat i on i s checked by t he LD2, LD3, and t he
LD5 on t he connect or board.
" With t he CS3 ON ..... LD2 i s OFF
" With t he CS4 ON ..... LD3 i s OFF
. - . LD5 i s ON
The t i mi ng on t he t i mi ng p l a t e t ha t t ur ns t he CS3 and CS4 ONIOFF i s as
shown below.
" CS3 ..... ON i n t he 60" t o 115" s ect i on
" CS4 ..... ON i n t he 130" t o 220" s ect i on
The t i mi ng t h a t t ur ns t he CS3 and t he CS4 ON/OFF has t o be adj ust ed a t onl y
one poi nt , t hen t he ot her 3 poi nt s w i l l be s e t aut omat i cal l y.
Therefore
when adj us t i ng, adj us t t he t i mi ng s o t h a t t he CS3 t ur ns ON on 60".
15. The CS3 and CS4 timing switches
(2) Paper f eed del ayed t i mi ng de t e c t i on
The paper f eed del ayed t i mi ng de t e c t i on i s done by us i ng t h e t i mi ng swi t ch
(CS3) and t he phot o s ens or (PHI) on t he f e e de r board. When t he s heet of paper
r eaches t he PHI, i f t he CS3 i s OFF, i t wi l l be judged t h a t t he paper f eed
t i mi ng i s del ayed. Ther ef or e, t h e s heet of paper has t o r each t he PHI
between 60" and 115" on t h e t i mi ng p l a t e .
(Reference) I f you t hi nk t h a t t he paper f eed t i mi ng i s not del ayed, t he
r eachi ng t i mi ng shoul d be 68".
(3) Sheet count
The s he e t count i s done by t he t i mi ng s wi t ch CS3 and t he phot o sensor (PHI)
on t h e f e e de r board. When t he CS3 t u r n s OFF ( 115") , t h e s he e t count er adds
one i f t he PHI d e t e c t s t he s he e t of paper and out put s t he count s i g n a l (For
t h e t a pe i n s e r t e r ) .
(4) Feed jam
The f eed jam de t e c t i on i s done by t he t i mi ng swi t ches CS3, CS4, t h e phot o
s ens or (PHI) on t he f e e de r board and t h e paper f eed drum phot o s ens or ( P H ~ ) .
When t he CS3 t ur ns OFF ( 115") , t h e r e i s a s he e t of paper over t h e PHI, and
when t he CS4 t ur ns ON a f t e r one r o t a t i o n (130') and t he s he e t of paper has
not reached t he PH4, t h i s wi l l be de t e c t e d a s a f eed jam.
(5) The f i r s t u n i t c yl i nde r ON
The f i r s t u n i t c yl i nde r ON de t e c t i on i s done by t h e timing*' swi t ch CS4 and
t he paper f eed drum phot o s ens or ( P H~ ) . When t h e CS4 t ur ns ON ( 130°) , it
j udges whet her t he r e i s a s heet of paper over t h e PH4. Then t ur ns t h e f i r s t
u n i t c yl i nde r ON sol enoi d ON o r OFF.
(6) The second u n i t c yl i nde r ON
The second u n i t c yl i nde r ON de t e c t i on i s done by t h e t i mi ng s wi t ch CS4 and
t he paper f eed drum phot o s ens or ( P H ~ ) . When t h e CS4 t ur ns ON ( 130°) , i t
j udges whet her t he r e i s a s he e t of paper over t h e PH4. Then t u r n s t h e
second u n i t c yl i nde r ON sol enoi d ON o r OFF when t h e CS4 t ur ns OFF (220").
16. Lowering the delivery table dolly
16. Lowering the delivery table dolly
Thi s machine us es an capaci t ance s ens or t o lower t he d e l i v e r y t a b l e dol l y.
The s e n s i t i v i t y shoul d be a dj us t e d i n t h e f ol l owi ng pr ocedur e:
a ) With no paper p i l e d on t h e d e l i v e r y t a b l e
,LED@
d o l l y , t u r n t h e adj ust ment scr ew ( 2) i n
t h e cl ockwi se d i r e c t i o n u n t i l t he LED (1)
j u s t l i g h t s up.
b) Turn t he adj ust ment screw (2) i n t h e coun-
t er cl ockwi s e d i r e c t i o n by appr oxi mat el y 90
/
degr ees from t h e p o s i t i o n where t h e LED
( 1) j u s t l i g h t s up.
/
Adjustment screw @
Thi s i s mer el y a b a s i c adj ust ment . Be s ur e t o check t h e f ol l owi ng a f t e r
t h e s e n s i t i v i t y adj ust ment i s f i ni s he d.
(Checking) Run t he machine and f eed s he e t s of paper . Then check t h a t t he
c a pa c i t a nc e sensor d e t e c t s a s he e t of paper c o n s i s t a n t l y and t h e
d e l i v e r y t a b l e d o l l y l ower s.
I f t he d e l i v e r y t a b l e d o l l y does not l ower , t u r n t h e adj ust ment
screw ( 2) i n t h e cl ockwi se d i r e c t i o n t o i nc r e a s e t h e
s e n s i t i v i t y . I f t he de l i ve r y t a b l e l ower s i r r e s p e c t i v e of t h e
paper f eed o r de l i ve r y, t u r n t h e adj ust ment screw ( 2) i n t h e
count er cl ockwi se d i r e c t i o n t o r educe t h e s e n s i t i v i t y .
(Not e) I f t h e s ur f a c e of t h e de l i ve r y t a b l e d o l l y l ower i ng s wi t ch i s
d i r t y wi t h f or e i gn articles ( s pr ay powder and paper d u s t ) , t h e
s wi t ch may mal f unct i on. Be s ur e t o al ways c l e a n t h e s ur f a c e
of t h e s wi t ch.
17 . Flow charts
17 . Flow charts
The fl ow c h a r t s e xpl a i n t h i s machines c onr r ol program. and e xpl a i n ever y
f unc t i on sequence of t he machine a t each s t a ge . Use t he s e t o l e a r n t h e
ba s i c f unc t i oni ng and sequenci ng of t h e machine ope r a t i on and t o check t he
i nput and t he out put f o r a f t e r s a l e s s e r v i c e . On t h e r i g h t s i d e of t h e
fl ow c h a r t t he expl anat i on of t h e p a r t s i s gi ven .
[Page I
(1) Turn on t he power ........................................... 71
( 2) Green lamp .................................................. 72
( 3) Dr i ve motor ope r a t i on ........................................ 73
( 4 ) Dr i ve motor s t op ....................................a.S..... 74
(5) The f i r s t u n i t i nchi ng ...................................... 75
( 6) The second u n i t i nchi ng ..................................... 76
( 7) Pl a t e clamp pos i t i oni ng ..................................... 77
.......................................................
(8) Speed 78
.................................................. ( 9) Pump motor 79
(10) Feed ON ..................................................... 80
....................................................
(1 1) Feed OFF 81
...................................... (12) S t a r t i n g t he end c yc l e 82
(13) Oper at i ng l e ve r r e t u r n t o pos i t i on 111 ...................... 83
.................................. ( 14) Aut oma~i c bl anket cl eani ng 84
(15) Oper at i ng l e ve r r e t u r n t o p o s i t i o n I ........................ 85
(16) Pushi ng t h e but t on t o s t a r t bl anket c l e a ni ng ................ 86
........................................
(17) The bl anket cl eani ng 87
(18) Lever synchr oni zi ng ......................................... 88
............................................
(19) No . 1 i nk duct or 89
............................................ (20) No . 2 i nk duct or
90
(21) No . 1 wat er duct or .....................................-..a 91
..........................................
(22) No . 2 wat er duct or 92
(23) Spray devi ce ................................................ 93
( 2 4 ) Lowering t he de l i ve r y t a b l e d o l l y ........................... 94
(25) The f i r s t uni t c yl i nde r ON .................................. 95
(26) The second u n i t c yl i nde r ON ................................. 96
(27) Sheet count er addi ng ........................................ 97
(28) Lubr i c a t i onwa r ni ng ......................................... 98
17 . Flow charts
[Page I
( 29) Pump f i l t e r c l e a ni ng war ni ng .................................. 99
(30) Paper f eed del ayed t i mi ng d e t e c t o r ............................ 100
(31) Feed jam ...................................................... 101
(32) The f i r s t u n i t bl anket jam .................................... 102
(33) The second u n i t bl anket j am .................................... 103
17. Flow charts
( 1) Turn on t h e power
Tot a l out put OF?
m
PL22 Se t
a
LD30 Se t
0
Thi s i s t he program used onl y when t ur ni ng
on t h e main power.
I Si gn I LD17 l ~ a me I Bat t er y warni ng lamp I
PB22 Name The second u n i t normal
I Si gn I I I r o t a t i o n i nchi ng but t on I
Remarks
When t he b a t t e r y on t h e CPU board i s
weak, t h e LD17 wi l l l i g h t .
Check l i n e
I Check l i n e I L6 I Check d a t a I D2 I
I Remarks I
Remarks 1
26
The second u n i t r e ve r s e
r o t a t i o n i nchi ng but t on
Sign
The f i r s t u n i t ON/OFF
I Si gn (PL2 (Name /
Memorizes t he power OFF c ondi t i on and
i n d i c a t e s t h a t condi t i on.
Check d a t a
PB23 ,
The second u n i t ON/OFF
I Si gn IP1.22 INameI I
Dl
Name
Memorizes t he power OFF c ondi t i on and
i n d i c a t e s t h a t condi t i on.
( Si gn 1 ~ ~ 3 0 1 Name I Count ON/OFF lamp 1
I
Memorizes t he power OFF c ondi t i on and
i n d i c a t e s t h a t condi t i on.
1 Si gn 1 ~ 1 6 ]Name I Feed OFF r e l a y I
Remarks
Plain program
i",
17. Flow charts
( 2) Green l amp
Green lamp
a
Thi s i s t he program t h a t l i g h t s t he ON o r OFF
green lamp.
Name The f i r s t u n i t emergency
/ Sign / I I s t op but t on
I Check l i n e I L5 I Check da t a / DO
I
I Remarks I I
PB21 Name
The second u n i t emergency
/ Si gn I I 1 s t op but t on
Check l i n e I L6
I
Si gn 1 ~ ~ 6 6 /Name I Saf et y cover s wi t ch( 0pt i on) I
Si gn
I Check l i n e I L9 . I Check d a t a I DO
1
Remarks
Check da t a
The cover s wi t ches a r e a l l N.C.
1 Remarks 1
Ther ef or e t he checki ng LEDs us ual l y
l i g h t and when t he cover i s opened,
t he l i g h t goes o f f .
DO
LS52-
64
Check l i n e I L10
I Check l i n e I L11 I Check d a t a I DO
I
Check dat a DO - D7
Name
Sign
/
s i gn I ;ii7i Name I Saf et y s wi t ch
Saf et y cover swi t ch
PB50
Check l i n e / L11 1 Check dat a / D2 - D6
I Remarks I .I
Name
Remarks
Si gn I LS13 1 ~ s m e
Del i ver y s e c t i o n emergency
s t o p but t on
The emergency s t op but t on
s a f e t y swi t ches a r e a l l N.C.
Ther ef or e t he checki ng LEDs us ual l y
l i g h t and when t he s wi t ch oper at es ,
t he ? i o h t aoes o f f .
Del i ver y jam s wi t ch
Check l i n e I L2 I Check da t a I D7
Si gn
Si gn
Si gn
Si gn
Si gn
The second u n i t bl anket
iam lamp
LD5
LD7
LD9
LDlO 1 Name , I Del i ver y jam lamp
LD4 /Name 1 Green lamp
Name
Name
Name
The f i r s t u n i t bl anket jam
lamp
Feed jam lamp
17. Flow charts
(3) Dr i ve mot or ope r a t i on
I Check line I L8 I Check data I D3 I
PBlO
PBlO >
-
I Remarks I 1
Name
Remarks
If even one safety switch actuates,
I
/ the machine will stop.
Start Button
Buzzer sounds Buzzer sounds
Motor normal rotation
1: : : z:: 1 Name relay ,
1
Name Motor reverse rotation
relay
Remarks
[ Sign I / Name I Safety switch
I Sign I LD9 I Name 1 Feed jam lamp I
Sign
Sign
Sign 1 ~ ~ 1 0 1 Name l ~ e l i v e r ~ jam lamp
Remarks I
LD5
LD7
I Remarks I I
Sign
Name
Name
The second unit blanket
lamp
The first unit blanket
jam lamp
For the safety switches shown below if even only one actuates, the machine will stop.
Motor normal rotation
relay
R1O
Sign
-
PB1
PB21
LS13
LS66
LS52
LS53
LS54
LS55
LS56
Name
Name
The first unit back safety cover switch
The first unit top safety cover switch
The first unit front safety cover switch
Delivery section emergency stop button
The second unit safety bar switch
The second unit vertical image adjustment safety
switch
Handwheel safety switch
--
The first unit safety bar switch
The first unit vertical image adjustment safety
switch
Name
The first unit emergency stop button
The second unit emergency stop button
Delivery unit jam switch
Feeder safety cover switch (Option)
Delivery section safety cover switch
The second unit back safety cover switch
The second unit top safety cover switch
The second unit front safety cover switch
Impression cylinder safety cover switch
-
Sign
LS60
LS6l
LS64
PB50
LS57
LS58
LS59
LS62
LS63
17. Flow charts
( 4 ) Drive motor s t o p
Dr i ve mot or
(7)
Si gn ( LS13 (Name I ~ e l i v e r ~ jam swi t ch
Check l i n e I L2 I Check da t a I D7
[ Si gn 1 ~ ~ 1 0 I Name I Del i ver y jam lamp 1
I
Si gn ( LS52-64 I Name I Sa f e t y cover swi t ch
1
I Check l i n e I L10 I Check da t a I DO - D7 1
Si gn
Saf et y cover s wi t ch
Check l i n e I L9 Check da t a / DO
I Remarks ( I
Del i ver y s e c t i on
emergency s t o p but t on
Sign
Check l i n e ( L11
I I I
Remarks
PB50
Check d a t a
Si gn
Si gn
Si gn
Name
DO
LS57-63
R10
R?1
Name
Check I i ne
Sa f e t y swi t ch
L11 Check da t a
Name
Name
D2-D6
Motor normal r o t a t i o n
r e l a y
Motor r e ve r s e r o t a t i o n
r e l a y
17. Flow charts
(5) The f i r s t u n i t i nchi ng
I Sign 1 PBl I Name I
The first unit
emergency stop button I
Check line
1 Remarks 1 I
The second unit
Sign 1 ~ ' ~ ' I Name / em6rgenc-y s t o ~ button I
~emarksl
L5
The first unit
emergency stop lamp
Sign
I Check line I L6 IData line I DO I
1 Remarks 1 I
Data line
PL1
I Sign lPB5O I Name I Delivery section
emergency stop button
DO
Name
1 Remarks 1 I
Check line
I Sign lPB2 I Name I
The first unit normal
rotation inchine button I
I I I
Check line I L5 I~ata line 1 Dl 1
L11
I Sign /PB3 I Name 1
The second unit reverse
rotation inching button 1
I Check line I L5 I Data line I D2
I
Safety switch
Data line I D2-D6
Data line
Sign
I Remarks I I
DO
Check line I L11
LS57-63
(Note)
The inching movement time period from start
to stop has been set to 0.6 seconds on the
so£ tware.
Name
Sign
Sign
Remarks
Name
Name
R10
R11
Motor normal rotation
relay
hlotor reverse rotation
relay
17. Flow charts
(6) The second u n i t i nchi ng
The second
u n i t i nc hi ng
Sign
Check l i n e I L6
1 Remarks 1 I
PB21
Si gn
Remarks 1
Data l i n e
I I I
- .
Check l i n e I L5 ( Dat a l i n e DO
Name
DO
PL21
Si gn
1 Remarks 1 I
The second u n i t
emergency s t o p b u t t o n
I Si gn I PBIO / blame I
De l i ve r y s e c t i o n
emereencv s t o ~ b u t t o n I
Name
PS1
The second u n i t
emergency s t o p lamp
Name
Check l i n e
he. f i r s t u n i t
emergencv s t o p b u t t o n
L11
Check l i n e
Si gn ( ~557- 631 Name I Dat a Sa f e t y line- s wi t c h
L11 I Dat a l i n e / D2 - D6
P.emarks 1
/ Si qn / PB21 1 Name I
The second u n i t r e v e r s e
r o t a t i o n i nc hi ng but t on 1
Sign
Check l i n e
I Check l i n e 1 L6 I Dat a 1 i n e I D2 I
1 Remarks 1
PB22
ema arks 1
L6
1 Remarks 1 I
Name
Dat a l i n e
Sign
Sign
( Not e)
The second u n i t normal
r o t a t i o n i nc hi ng b u t t o n
Dl
The i n c h i n g movement t i me pe r i od from s t a r t
t o s t o p h a s been s e t t o 0 . 6 s econds on t h e
so£ t war e.
R1O
R1l
Name
Name
Motor nor mal
r o t a t i o n r e l a y
Motor r e v e r s e
r o t a t i o n r e l a y
17. Flow charts
(7) Plate clamp positioning
t
Si g n
Remarks 1 See (3) Dr i ve mot or o p e r a t i o n (Page 73).
I Si gn I PI32 I Name I
The f i r s t u n i t nor mal ro-
t a t i o n ' i nchi ne. b u t t o n I
Check l i n e L5 I Check d a t a I D I
Remarks I
Sign PR22 Name
The s,ncond u n i t normal roi
t a t i o n i nc hi ng b u t t o n
I Check l i n e 1 ~6 1 Check d a t a I Dt I
I Remarks I
I
The f i r s t u n i t r e v e r s e
I s i g n l p ~ 3 I Name I r o t a t i o n i nc hi ng b u t t o n I
I Check l i n e I L5 I Check d a t a I D2
I
I Remarks I I
I Si g n 1 PB23 I Name I
The second u n i t r e v e r s e
r o t a t i o n inch in^ b u t t o n I
I Check l i n e ( L6 1 Check d a t a ( D2
I
1 Remarks I I
Sign CS, Name
The f i r s t u n i t p l a t e
mount i ng p o s i t i o n
Check Li ne Lt Check d a t a D5
(
Remarks I --..-A
I S i g n l ~ 1 0 1 Name I ~ o t o r nor mal r o t a t i o n r e l a y I
I s i n n l ~ l t 1 Name I Mot or r e v e r s e r o t a t i o n r e l a y 1
Remarks
I
Si gn CS2s Name
The second u n i t p l a t e
mount i ng p o s i t i o n I
I
Check l i n e L2 Check d a t a D5
Remarks 1
17. Flow charts
( 8 ) Speed
Speed
(7
i nchi ng
i-
I I OFF I
Speed lpeed
lOOOrph outpl -ph out put
S
s e t t i n g IPeed va l ue 1 1 70001
out put I
Thi s i s t he program t h a t sends t he speed
s e t t i n g d i g i t a l s i g n a l t o t he i n v e r t e r c ont r ol
c i r c u i t .
Dur i ng t he p l a t e mounting means dur i ng t he
r o t a t i o n t o s e t t he p l a t e c yl i nde r a t t he p l a t e
mounting pos i t i on.
' Si gn
Si gn
Remarks
Remarks
Si gn
Sign
Motor normal r o t a t i o n r e l a y
Motor r e ve r s e r o t a t i o n r e l a y
R10
R11
I Remarks /
Name
Name
R5
R25
Si gn
The speed s e t t i n g va l ue i s t he speed t h a t i s
s e t by us i ng t h e PB38 t hr ough PR40.
Name
Name
LD16
The f i r s t uni t bl anket
cl eani ng r e l a y
The second u n i t bl anket
c l e a ni ng r e l a y
Name lO0Orph but t on
17. Flow charts
(9) Pump mot or
Pump motor
u
Remarks
I I
Check l i n e I L2 I Check d a t a I DO, Dl
Pumpbut t on
! I I
Si gn LS22, Name Oper at i ng l e ve r 2
2 3
Check l i n e 1 ~ 8 ] Check d a t a I D4
Name Si gn
I Check l i n e I L2 I Check d a t a I Dl , D2 I
PB13
Si gn
Si gn
Check l i n e I L1 I I Check d a t a I DO, D l
LS1, 2
Remarks
LD15
I
I I
END
Name
Pumpr el ay Si gn
Oper at i ng l e ve r 1
Name
Remarks 1
Feed OFF r e l a y Si gn
Pump lamp
R15
Remarks 1
Name
R16 Name
17. Flow charts
( 1 0) Feed ON
Feed ON
0
LDll OFF
Rl h OFF
Feed ON
1 Si gn 1 5515 ON IName I Feed ON s wi t ch
I Check l i n e I L1 1 Check d a t a I D6
I
I Remarks I I
I Si gn I LS4, 5 /Name 1 Oper at i ng l e ve r 1 I
( Check l i n e I L1 I Check d a t a I D3 , D4
I
Si gn I LS24, 251Name I Oper at i ng l e ve r 2
Check l i n e 1 L2 I Check d a t a 1 D3 , D4
I Remarks I I
1 Check l i n e I L2 I Check d a t a 1 D6 I
-
I Remarks I I
Sign
( Si gn I SS15 0FFl ~ame I Feed OFF s wi t ch I
LS12
Check l i n e I L1
I Remarks 1 I
Name
Si gn
Del i ver y t a bl e d o l l y
lower l i mi t s wi t ch
Remarks 1
Check d a t a D7
LDll
Si gn
Remarks
Si gn
Name
R13
Paper f eed del ayed
t i mi ng lamp
Remarks 1
R16
Name
Paper f eed del ayed
t i mi ng r e l a y
Name Feed OFF r e l a y
..._
.. - 17. Flow charts
( 1 1) Feed OFF
Feed OFF
a
Remarks
Si gn
Remarks
Remarks
PL2
Sign
Remarks
lower l i mi t swi t ch
Remarks
Remarks
Name
PL22
The f i r s t uni t
ON/OFF lamp
Remarks
Name
Si gn I R16
The second uni t
ON/OFF lamp
Name Feed OFF r e l a y
17. Flow charts
( 12) Starting t he end cycl e
/ PBl l \
end c\
r-
\I/ YES I
YES
c
YES
Si gn I PBl l ]Name I End cycl e but t on
Check l i n e I LB 1 Check d a t a I DO
Remarks
I Si gn I LS1, 2 [Name ( Oper at i ng l e ve r 1 [
I Check l i n e I LI I Check d a t a 1 DO, Dl I
I Si gn I LS21, 221Name I Oper at i ng l e ve r 2 1
I Check l i n e I L2 I Check d a t a I DO, Dl I
Remarks
J
I Si gn I R16 (Name I Feed OFF r e l a y I
( Remarks ( 1
Si gn
Remarks
LD13 Name End cycl e lamp
17. Flow charts
(13) Operating lever return to position I11
Thi s i s t h e program t h a t r e t ur ns t he
ope r a t i ng l e ve r t o p o s i t i o n I11 dur i ng t he
end cycl e.
I Remarks 1 I
Si gn
I Si gn I LS4, 5 1 Name I ope r a t i ng l e v e r 1 /
I Check l i n e I L1 I Check d a t a I D3 , D4 I
PL2
1 Remarks 1 I
/ Si gn 1 R4
Oper at i ng l e v e r 1
r e t u r n r e l a y I
Name
1 Remarks 1 I
The f i r s t u n i t
ON/OFF lamp
1 Remarks 1 1
Si gn
I Si gn I LS24, 251~ame ] Oper at i ng l e v e r 2 1
PL22
Check l i n e
1 Remarks 1 I
Name
Si gn
(Note)
The R4 and t he R24 keep a c t ua t i ng u n t i l
t h e ope r a t i ng l e ve r s r e t u r n t o t h e posi -
t i o n 111.
The second u n i t
ON/OFF lamp
Remarks 1
L2
R24
Check d a t a D3 , D4
Name
Oper at i ng l e v e r 2
r e t u r n r e l a y
17. Flow charts
(1 4 ) Automatic blanket cleaning
k e t cl eani ng
Thi s i s t he bl anket cl eani ng program dur i ng
t h e end cycl e.
NO
OFF
'3,
Remarks
1 Remarks 1 1
The f i r s t u n i t
ON/OFF lamp
Si gn
Remarks
Name Si gn
The f i r s t u n i t
R5
PL2
/ Name 1 bl anket cl eani ng r e l a y /
Sign
Remarks
Name PL22
The second u n i t
bl anket cl eani ng r e l a y
The second u n i t
ON/OFF lamp
Remarks
Name Si gn
Si gn I CS4 OFF I Name
R2 5
Check l i n e
Timing s wi t ch
Check da t a
Blanket cleaning roca-
tion number preset svltch
I R2
Check da t a
Remarks
DO - D3
One r o t a t i o n i s count ed when t h e CS4
t i mi ng s wi t ch t ur ns OFF. When t he
t o t a l number of r o t a t i o n s equal s t he
pr e s e t number o f r o t a t i o n s , t he
bl anket cl eani ng cycl e i s f i ni s he d.
The number of bl anket cl eani ng cycl e
r o t a t i o n s = (DS1) x 4 + 20 t i mes.
Name Si gn DS1
Check l i n e L3
17. Flow charts
(15) Oper at i ng l e ve r r e t u r n t o p o s i t i o n I
Oper at i ng
l e v e r r e t u r n
t o ~ o s i t i o n I
Tape out put
#
Pr i nt e d number of
s he e t s r e s e t
I
NO
v
The preset ouaber The pres et number
o f sheets i ndi cati on of s heet s i ndi cat i on
not changed changed
I
he end cycle\
The pres et number
not changed
'-
Thi s i s t he program t h a t r e t ur ns t he ope r a t i ng
l e v e r from p o s i t i o n 111 t o p o s i t i o n I dur i ng
t h e end cycl e.
I Si gn / PLZ ) Na me / The ON/OFF f i r s t lamp u n i t
I
Remarks I
I Si gn 1 LSl I Name I Oper at i ng l e v e r 1 I
Check l i n e
I Remarks I I
Si gn
/ Si gn IPL22 I NameI The ON/OFF second lamp u n i t
I
Remarks I
L1
Remarks
R4
I Si gn ( LS21 I Name I Oper at i ng l e ve r 2 1
Check d a t a DO
Name
Oper at i ng l e v e r 1
r e t u r n r e l a y
Check l i n e
I Remarks I I
Si gn
I Si gn ILD13 I Na me I En d c y c l e l a mp I
Remarks 1
L2
I Remarks I 1
R24
s f i ni s he d
Check d a t a DO
Name
Oper at i ng l e v e r 2
r e t u r n r e l a y
17. Flow charts
(16) Pushing the button to start blanket clea
YES
YES
Buzzer sounds Buzzer sounds
t
END
Thi s i s t h e program s t a r t e d when pushi ng t he
bl anket cl eani ng but t on.
Remarks
Si gn PB12
Sign
Check l i n e
Name
DS2-1
Si gn
Rl anket cl eani ng
but t on
Remarks I 1
L9
The f i r s t u n i t
PL2
/ Name / ONIOFF lamp
Remarks
Name
1
Check l i n e
Remarks 1
Bl anket cl eani ng
I)N/I)FFswitch
Check d a t a
I Si gn I L S ~ I Name ) o p e r a t i n g l e v e r 1
D6
Remarks 1
L1
Si gn
I S i g n R 7 I Na me /
The f i r s t u n i t
c vl i nde r ON r e l a v 1
Check d a t a I D3
oN/oFF lamp 1
Name PL22
[ Remarks 1 1
The second u n i t
Si gn
Remarks 1
LS24 I Name
-
Oper at i ng l e v e r 2
I Remarks I I
Check d a t a
Si gn LD14 Name Bl anket c l e a ni ng lamp
Remarks 1
D3 Check l i n e
The second u n i t
c yl i nde r ON r e l a y
L2
Name Sign R27
17. Flow charts
( 1 7) The bl anket cl eani ng
This is the blanket cleaning program when
pushing the blanket cleaning button.
NO
Both OFF
/ Either one ON I
Remarks
Sign
I Check line I L1 ]check data I D3 I
PL2
Sign
I Remarks 1
Name
LS4
I Remarks 1 I
The first unit
ON/OFF lamp
Sign
I Sign I LS24 I Name loperating lever 2 1
Name
I Check line I L2 1 Check data I D3
I
Operating lever 1
PL22
I Remarks 1 I
I Sign
Name
R5 I Name I
The first unit
blanket cleaning relay I
The second unit
ON/OFF lamp
I Remarks 1 I
I Sign R25 1 Name I
The second unit
blanket cleaning relay I
I Sign
Sign
Blanket cleaning rota-
tion number preset switch
I Check line I L3 /check data I DO - 03 1
Check line I IR2 [check data I
CS4 OFF
R5, R25 OFF
u
Remarks
Name
One rotation is counted when the CS4
timing switch turns OFF. When the .
total number of rotations equals the
preset number of rotations, the
blanket cleaning cycle is finished.
Timing switch
The number of blanket cleaning cycle
rotations = (DS1) x 4 + 20 times.
1 R e ; 1 1 . L D , ~ 1 Name 1 Blanket cleaning 1.m~ 1
17. Flow charts
(1 8) Lever synchronizing
s ync hr oni z i ng
a
Th i s i s t h e program f o r s ync hr oni z i ng bot h
u n i t s o p e r a t i n g l e v e r s .
I Si gn I PLZ I Name 1
The f i r s t u n i t
oN/oFF lamp I
I S' ign / PLZZ / Name 1 The wi t 1
ON/OFF lamp
I Si n n I LS1-5 I Name 10De r a t i ne l e v e r 1 1
I Check l i n e I L1
I Check d a t a I DO - D4 I
Remarks
For t h e o p e r a t i n g l e v e r advance
d i r e c t i o n movement, t h e o p e r a t i n g
l e v e r moves i n t h e p o s i t i o n I t o
t h e p o s i t i o n V d i r e c t i o n , and f o r
t h e r e t u r n d i r e c t i o n movement, t h e
o p e r a t i n g l e v e r moves i n t h e pos i -
t i o n V t o t h e p o s i t i o n I d i r e c t i o n .
I Si g n / R24
/ Name I Ope r a t i ng l e v e r 2
r e t u r n r e l a v I
Si g n
I Remarks I 1
I
Si g n / :ZZ1 ^ I Name ( Op e r a t i n g l e v e r 2
1
R23 Name
- -
Check l i n e
I Remarks 1 I
Op e r a t i n g l e v e r 2
advance r e l a y
Si g n
Si g n
L2
Remarks
R3
R4
Check d a t a
For t h e o p e r a t i n g l e v e r advance
di r ect ; - on movement, t h e o n e r a t i n g
l e v e r moves i n t h e p o s i t i o n 1 t o
t h e p o s i t i o n V d i r e c t i o n , and f o r
t h e r e t u r n d i r e c t i o n movement, t h e
o p e r a t i n g l e v e r moves i n t h e pos i -
t i o n V t o t h e p o s i t i o n I d i r e c t i o n .
DO - D4
Name
Name
Ope r a t i ng l e v e r 1
advance r e l a y
n p ~ r a t i n g l e v e r 1
r e t u r n r e l a v
17. Flow charts
(19) No. 1 ink duc t or
/ SS2 AUTO \
7
R2 OFF R2 ON
The first unit The first unit
ink ductor ON ink ductor OFF
i
I
Sign
Check line
Name SS2
Remarks
The first unit ink
ductor manual switch
Remarks
L5
Sign
t I I
Name SS2 AUTO
Remarks
Check data
The first unit ink
ductor automatic switch
D7 Check line I L5
D6
Check data
Sign Name R7
Sign
The first unit
cylinder ON relay
The first unit ink
R2
/ lame 1 ductor stop relay 1
17. Flow charts
(20) NO. 2 i nk d u c t o r
No.2 ink ductor
Cli
ductor manual switch
Remarks
ductor automatic switch
Reorarks
Remarks
Sign
The second unit The second unit
ink ductor ON ink ductor OFF
R27
Sign
Remarks
Name
The second unit
cylinder ON relay
The second unit ink
ductor stop relay
R22 Name
17. Flow charts
( 21) No. 1 water duc t or
Sign SSl
Name The f i r s t uni t wat er
duct or manual swi t ch
Remarks
The f i r s t u n i t The f i r s t u n i t
wat er duct or ON wat er duc t or OFF
duct or aut omat i c swi t ch
Remarks
Si gn
Remarks
Name R7
The f i r s t u n i t wat er
duct or s t o p r e l a y
Si gn
The f i r s t u n i t c yl i nde r
ON r e l a y
Remarks
R8
17. Flow charts
( 22) No. 2 water ductor
d u c t o r
OFF
ON
<
I OFF k - 1
The s econd u n i t The s econd u n i t
The s econd u n i t wa t e r
Sign SS21 Name d u c t o r manual s wi t c h
Check d a t a D4
Remarks
d u c t o r a ut oma t i c s wi t c h
Remarks
The s econd u n i t c y l i n d e r
ON r e l a y
Si g n
Si gn
Remarks
Remarks
R27 Name
The s econd u n i t wa t e r
d u c t o r s t o p r e l a y
R28 Name
17. Flow charts
Spray de vi c e
C?
Ei t h e r
r
I Si gn I R ~ S I Name / Pump mot or r e l a y I
Si gn
1 Remarks 1 I
SS4
I Si gn IR7 I Name /
The f i r s t u n i t c y l i n d e r
ON r e l a y I
I Ei gnI R27
I ~ a m e I The second u n i t c y l i n d e r
ON r e l a y I
Name
Check l i n e
Spray pump r e l a y Si gn
I Remarks I I
em arks 1
Spray s wi t ch
Check d a t a L4
em arks 1
one
0 3
R14
I Si gn 1 ~ 1 7 I ~ a m e I Spray va l ve r e l a y I
Name
17. Flow charts
( 2 4 ) Lowering t he de l i ve r y t a bl e d o l l y
I SignILS12 I Name/ Delivery lowcr limit table switch dolly
R12 ON
Lowering the
delivery table
R12 OFF
Stopping the
delivery table
Check line
Remarks
Sign LD12
Remarks1
L2
Name
Sign
Check data
Delivery table dolly
lower 1 imit lamp
Check line
\Then the CS2 delivery table dolly lowering sen-
sor actuates ON once, the delivery table dolly
lowering relay R12 will turn ONand stay ON
for about 3 seconds as written in the softwate.
D6
CS2
Sign
~emarksl
L4
Name
R12
Delivery table dolly
lowering sensor
Check data D6
Name
Delivery table dolly
lower in^ relay
17. Flow charts
(25) The f i r s t u n i t c yl i nde r ON
Memorizes that Memorizes that
there is no sheet there is a sheet
of paper over of paper over the
I the pH4 , 1 lPH4 , 1
The first unit The first unit
I Sign I C S ~ I Name I Timing switch I
I Check line I IR4 1 Check data 1 I
1 Remarks 1 I
1 Check line I L4 I Check date I C 2
1
Sign
1 Remarks 1 I
Memorizes whether there is a sheet of paper
over the PH4 to judge when turning the second
unit cylinder ON or OFF. See (26) The second
unit cylinder ON (page 96).
Lmpressi.on control.
sensor
PR4
1 Remarks 1 I
Name
Sign
Remarks
PL2
Sign
I ~ i g n I ~ 7 / I
The first unit cylinder
Name ON relay I
The first unit ON/OFF
Name
1 amp
1 Remarks 1 I
R5 Name
The first unit blanket
cleaning relay
17. Flow charts
( 26) The second u n i t c yl i nde r ON
Remarks
Si gn
J udge s based on t he memory whet her t h e r e i s a
s h e e t of pa pe r over t h e PH4 t h a t i s e xpl a i ne d
on (25) The f i r s t u n i t c y l i n d e r ON f l ow c h a r t
( page 95) .
Check l i n e I I R2 I Check d a t a I
CS4 Name I Ti mi ng s wi t c h
The second u n i t ON/OFF
1 amp
Remarks
Name Si gn
1
Remarks
PL22
Si gn Name R25
Si gn
The second u n i t b l a n k e t
c l e a n i n g r e1 ay
Name R27
The second u n i t c y l i n d e r
ON r e l a v
17. Flow charts
(27) Sheet counter adding
Sheet counter
( END , )
IJhen the CS3 turns OFF, each counter
adds one. I
Sign
Remarks
Check line I I R I 1 Check data I
CS3
Name
Memorizes whether there is a sheet of paper
over the PHI to judge for the feeder jam
detector.
Feeder photo sensor
I Sign 1 ~ ~ 3 0 I Name 1 Count ON/OFF lamp 1
Name
l~heck data I DO
Timing switch
17. Flow charts
- - -
(28) Lubrication warni ng
When the CS4
Lubrication
warning counter
LD2 OFF
0
warning counter
reset
1 Remarks 1 I
Sign I C S ~
h'hen the CS4 thing switch turns OFF, the counter
adds one. \.hen the total number oE rotations
is over 500,000 rotations, the LD2 lubrication
warning lamp lights to signal it is time to
lubricate the machine.
Name I Timing switch
Check 1ir.e I IR2 I Check data I
/ Sign / P BI 6 / Name I
Lubrication warning
reset button I
Sign
Remarks]
LD2
Check line
Name
L4
Lubrication warning lamp
Remarks
Check data
When pushing the PB16, the LD2 goes off
and the counter is reset.
D5
17. Flow charts
(29) Pump f i l t e r cl eani ng warning
cl eani ng warning
count er r e s e t
1 Remarks 1 I
Sign
When t he CS4 t i mi ng swi t ch t ur ns OFF, t he count er
adds one. h!en t he t o t a l number of r ot a t i ons i s
over 1, 000, 000 r o t a t i o n s , t he LD3 pump f i l t e r
cl eani ng warni ng lamp l i g h t s t o s i gna l i t i s
time t o c l e a n t he pump f i l t e r
Check l i ne 1 IR2 I Check daca I
CS4
I Sign / PBl5 I Name 1
Pump f i l t e r cl eani ng
warni ng r e s e t but t on I
Si gn
Name
LD3
Pump f i l t e r cl eani ng
I Name I warning lamp
Timing swi t ch
Check l i n e L4
Remarks
Check da t a
When pushi ng t he PB15, t he LD3 goes
o f f and t he count i s r e s e t .
D4
17. Flow charts
(30) Paper f e e d de l a ye d t i mi ng d e t e c t o r
1 Si gn / P HI I Name ] F e e d e r ? hot 0 s e n s o r 1
t u r n s ON.
Check l i n e
Remarks I
-I
The p a p e r f e e d d e l a y e d t i mi n g d e t e c -
I t o r d e t e c t s t h e moment t h a t t h e Plfl
L4
Si gn CS3 I Name 1 Ti mi ng s wi t c h
I Si g n /R16 I Name 1 Feed OFF r e l a y
Check d a t a
Check l i n e 1 ~ 4 1 c he c k d a t a I D7
Remarks
DO
Si gn
( Si gn 1 ~ 1 3 ( Name ( ~ e l a y e d p a p e r r e l a y [
SS8 Name Del ayed pa pe r OFF s wi t c h
Check l i n e
Remarks
Remarks I
Check d a t a L3
1
Si g n
D7
Remarks 1
LDl l Name Del ayed p a p e r l amp
17. Flow charts
(31) Feed j am
Feed jam
0
I Si gn I CS4 I Name I ~ i m i n ~ s wi t ch I
Si gn I PH4 I Name l l mpr essi on cont r ol s ens or
Check l i n e I L4 l ~ h e c k da t a 1 0 2
Check l i n e I IR4 Check d a t a
Remarks 1
Remarks
I Check l i n e I L3 l ~ h e c k dat a I D6 I
When a s heet of paper i s de t e c t e d,
i t t ur ns ON.
Si gn
I I I
Remarks 1
Judges based on t h e memory whet her t h e r e i s a
s he e t of paper over t he PHI t h a t i s expl ai ned
on ( 27) s he e t count er addi ng f l ow c h a r t
( page 97) .
SS7
I Si gn 1 LD9 I Name I Feed jam lamp I
Name
Feed jam de t e c t or OFF
s wi t ch
Si gn
Remarks
Si gn
~e ma r ks l
R16 Name Feed OFF r e l a y
R7 Name
The f i r s t u n i t c yl i nde r
OM r e l a y
17. Flow charts
(32) The first unit blanket jam
f h e f i r s t u n i t )
b l a n k e t jam
Si gn
1 S i g n l S S L
[ Na me 1 The jam d e t e c t o r f i r s t u n i t OFF b l a n k e t s wi t c h
I
Check l i n e
PH3
Remarks
I
I R1
Check l i n e
Plame
Check d a t a
Si gn
The f i r s t u n i t b l a n k e t
phot o s e n s o r
Remarks
L3
1 Remarks 1 I
LD7
The f i r s t u n i t c y l i n d e r
ON r e l a y
Si gn
Si gn R27
Check d a t a
R7 Name
The second u n i t c y l i n d e r
ON r e l a y
4
END
D5
Name
s i g n 1 ~ 1 6
The E i r s t u n i t b l a n k e t
jam lamp
Remarks
Name Feed OFF r e l a y
17. Flow charts
( 3 3 ) The second unit blanket j a m
1 Sign / PH2 I Name I
The second unit blanket
photo sensor
I I I .
Check line I I R5 I Check data I
I Sign / SSI 1 Name I
The second unit blanket
iam detector OFF switch I
I I I -
Check line I L 3 I Check data I D4
1 Sign / R7 / Name 1
The first unit cylinder
ON relay
Sign
I Sign / R2 7 I Name 1
The second unit cylinder
ON relay I
I Sign 1 ~ 1 6 I Name I Feed OFF relay I
LD5 Name
The second unit blanket
jam lamp
18. List of replacement parts
18. List of replacement parts
When or de r i ng r epl acement p a r t s , pl e a s e use t h e s pe c i f i e d p a r t s number
i ndi c a t e d i n ( >.
( 1) Oper at i on panel
LED
LSHD-28R
(98 930)
A3SA-7050-T (96 564)
(OMRON)
A3SA-5801-N (White)
(OMRON)
(96 592)
A3SA-5802-N (F.ed)
(OMRON)
PB4
PB24
Uni t ON-OFF
PB3
PB23
I nchi ng r e ve r s e
r o t a t i o n
PB2
PB2 2
I nchi ng normal
r o t a t i o n
( OMRON)
(96 594)
A3SA-5805-M(Ye1low)
PB15, PB16
Warning lamp r e s e t
but t on
18. List of replacement parts
( I ZUMI ) SS1, SS2
SS21, SS22
Ductor control
Switch DGAN-031-B(96 561), End plate DGNW-l-B(g6 562)
1
( r zuru
SS5, SS6, SS7, SS8
Jam ON-OFF switch
DS1
Blanket cleaning
cycle set
Switch M-2012~-2G(96 5491, Bezel AT-207~(96 550)
(NATIONAL)
@
(99 938)
Buzzer E.B 2124
BZ1 Buzzer for jam
18. List of replacement parts
(KLOCKNER-MOELLER)
PI-25/Svb(97 729)
Main ope r a t i on panel board(5340 6 1 648)
i
T
Main swi t ch
18. List of replacement parts
(2) Control box
Power source
circuit board
(5330 61 643-1)
Fuse 6.4 X 30 lOA(97 722)
I
Sensor printed circuit board(5330 61 644-2)
CPU board
With P-ROM
(5340 61 640-2)
Without P-ROM
(5330 61 641)
Display controller
(5340 61 645)
18. List of replacement parts
Connector board
( 5340 61 642-1)
Inverter controller
( 5340 61 647)
18. List of replacement parts
( 3 ) Sub control box
Contactor LC1-D093A60 (97 201)
Thermal LR1-DO9 310 (97 202)
LY-2N DC24V
DCR2-20D50
Terminal base BA211T
Separator BNL5(98 984)
Circuit ~rotector 4A
18. List of replacement parts
Circuit protector 7A
50Hz ..... FZ15111-349 (99 963)
60Hz ..... FZ15111-249 (99 962)
Fluorescent 1
UL type ... GX15112MA-svb
stabilizer
18. List of replacement parts
( 4 ) Parts outside the panel
(MITSUBISHI)
Inverter
FRZ120 1.5kW
(96 051)
UL type
(951 03 002)
(MITSUBISHI)
Drive motor
SB-JR 1.5kW
Noise absorber
BKO-C1947H01
U12CB9(UL)+A-40
Single phase
SB-JR 0.75kW
Compound transformer
18. List of replacement parts
Fluorescent lamp
15W
(99 960)
Lever advance
Lever return
Delayed paper
The first unit
cylinder ON
Lowering the deliver
table dolly
Feed stop
I
The second unit
cylinder ON
18. List of reolacement Darts
Bl anket c l e a ni ng
AP-B
(95 117)
(OMRON)
Z-15GS-B
(95 119)
P l a t e c yl i nde r
s e t t i n g p o s i t i o n s t o p
Double s he e t d e t e c t o r
Del i ver y t a b l e
d o l l y lower l i m i t
18. List of replacement parts
Del i very jam
Feed swi t ch
Timing swi t ch I
CS- 16-5N
( 96 531)
Del i very t a bl e
dol l y lower swi t ch
Operat i on l ever I
18. List of replacement parts
( 97 805)
Sensor assy
Impression control
sensor (PH4)
OAS-61LD-2
(97 823)
Sensor assy
I / Blanket jam sensor 1
18. List of replacement parts
(5) Pa r t s f o r connect i ng
I Fast on cover 170823-1 (110 s e r i e s ) (98 682) I
Fast on t e r mi na l 42470-1 (For 110 s e r i e s ) (98 681)
(AMP)
Fas t on cover 170892-1 (187 s e r i e s ) ( 98 514)
(AMP)
Fast on t e r mi na l 170038-1 (For 187 s e r i e s ) (98 500)
(AMP)
Fas t on cover 1-170823-5 (250 s e r i e s ) (98 536)
(AMP
Fast on t e r mi na l 42731-2 (For 250 s e r i e s ) (98 647)
(AMP
I
Shar e pl ug ( Recept acl e) 170021-1 (98 538)
I
18. List of re~lacement Darts
(AMP)
Share plug (plug) 170020-1 (98 540)
(AMP)
I
Insulation sleeve or receptacle) 170889-1 (98 539)
Insulation sleeve o or plug) 170887-1 (98 541)
(AMP)
Pin for universal mate-n-lock 350690-3 (98 787)
(AMP)
Socket for universal mate-n-lock 350689-3 (98 788)
(AMP)
Universal mate-n-lock connector (4P) 1-480702-0 (98 680)
18. List of replacement parts
Universal mate-n-lock connector (6P) 1-480704-0 (98 679)
I
(AMP)
I Universal mate-n-lock connector (9P) 1-480706-0 (98 639)
Universal mat e-n-lock connector (12~) 1-480708-0 (98 793)
I
I
Pin for CIS 163691-1 (98 560)
(AMP)
CIS male connector Housing 6P 163690-4 (98 795)
18. List of replacement parts
(AMP)
CIS male connector Housing 8P 163690-6 (98 550)
(AMP)
U S male connector Housing 10P 163690-8 (98 551)
CIS male connector Housing 16P 1-163690-5
/ (AMP)
I Universal mate-n-lock connector c a ~ 3P 1-480701-O(98 876) 1
Universal mate-n-lock connector cap 4P 1-480703-0 (98 737)
Universal mate-n-lock connector cap 12P 1-480709-0 (98 799)
I Universal mate-n-lock connector cap 6P 1-480705-0 (98 784) I
18. List of replacement parts
A = 5 . h
Nylon clamp 3304 (95 150)
A = 1 5 . h
Nylon clamp 3330 (98 809)
Nylon clamp 3334 (95 151)
A = 2.9mm
Nylon clamp 3302 (98 805)
19. Electrical circuit diagrams
19. Electrical circuit diagrams
(1) Sub control box circuit diagram
a) Single phase except for Europe
i i & ~ ~ O NVW @=--I
@ - - - - TERMI NAL BASE
MAIN SW.
MAI N MOTOR PUMP MOTOR ELECTRO STATIC
( 1 . 5 K W) ( 5 5 0 W ) ELI MI NATOR
I ,
SPRAY MOTOR SPRAY
( I O O W) VALVE
FLUORESCENT FA N
LAMP
19. Electrical circuit diagrams
c) Three phase except for Europe
19. Electrical circuit diagrams
d) Three phase for Europe
19. Electrical circuit diagrams
e) Three phase for the domestic
I - @ xoa N I V W ( 8- I
19. Electrical circuit diagrams
( 2 ) Power s o u r c e c i r c u i t boa r d
19. Electrical circuit diagrams
( 3 ) I nver t er cont r ol c i r c u i t
-
4
w -
-
0
a
X m
wrt
r- w
7 rt
P.
0 0
0 7
rt'c
rt w
0 7
r m
C1
a
tt
C1
19. Electrical circuit diagrams
c ) I nchi ng pa ne l wi r i n g di agr am
f
.'
MC 35 MC36
MACHI NE
PI N L I NE WI RE P I N Ll NH WI RE P I N LI NE Wl RE
N 0. N 0. COLOR N 0 . N 0. COLOR NO. NO. COLOR
NOTE
INPUT INTERRUPT
~1
L2
OUTPUT RELAY
LS5 (NON-OP-SIDE)
NO 1 LEVER POSITION V
LS25 (NON-OP-SIDE)
NO 2 LEVER POSITION Y
SS5 (SUB-PANEL)
NO 2 J A M OFF SW
PB1 5 (SUB-PANEL)
PUMP RESET BUTTON
SS1 MANU (NO 1 PANEL)
NO 1 WATER MANU
SS21 MANU( N0 2 PANEL)
NO 2 WATER MANU
PB34 ( MAI N PANEL)
10' BUTTON
PB13 ( MAI N PANEL)
PUMP BUTTON
LS56 (DP-SIDE)
NO 1 BACK COVER
LS59 (OP-SIDE)
HAND WHEEL SW
TIMING SW
SS15 OFF(FEE0ER OELIVE9Y)
FEED OFF SW
LS13 (DELIVERY)
CD J AM SW \
I IR3 I INTERNAL CIRCUIT I
LS4 (NON-OP-SIDE)
NO 1 LEVER POSITION N
LS24 (NON-OP-SIDE)
NO 2 LEVER POSITION N
pH2 (NO 2 BLANKET)
PHOTO SENSOR
SS6 (SUB-PANEL)
NO 1 J A M OFF SW
PB16 (SUB-PANEL)
OIL RESET BUTTON
SSl AUTO (NO 1 PANEL)
NO 1 WATER AUTO
SS21 AUTO( N0 2 PANEL)
NO 2 WATER AUTO
PB35 ( MAI N PANEL)
1 0 ' BUTTON
PB38 ( MAI N PANEL)
SPEED DOWN BUTTON
LS6O (NON-OP-SIDE)
IMPRESSION CYLlfiDER COVER
LS62 (OP-SIDE)
NO 1 SAFETY BAR
SS15 Obi (FEEDER DELIVERY)'
FEED ON SW 11SUbP
LS12 (DELIVERY)
CD BOTTOM SW 1 ~ ~ ~ %
SS8 (SUB-PANEL) S7 (SUB-PANEL)
I R2 I N0. l INK STOP SOL. I R27 I N0.2 IMPRESSION SOL. I
LS3 (NON-OP-SIDE)
NO 1 LEVER POSITION D
LS23 (NON-OP-SIDE)
NO 2 LEVER POSITION D
CS1 (OP-SIDE)
NO 1 PLATE POSITION
CS21 (OP-SIDE)
NO 2 PLATE POSITION
L4
L5
~6
L7
L8
~g
L1 0
L11
DS1 BLANKET WASH CYCLE (SUB-PANEL)
2' ( 8) 2' ( 4) 2' ( 2) Z0 ( 1)
CHECK PROGRAM OF OUTPUT
LS2 (NON-OP-SIDE)
NO 1 LEVER POSITION U
LS22 (NON-OP-SIDE)
NO 2 LEVER POSITION U
CS3 (NON-OP-SIDE)
TIMING SW
SS2 AUTO (NO 1 PANEL)
NO 1 INK AUTO
SS22 AUTO( N0 2 PANEL)
NO 2 INK AUTO
PB37 ( MAI N PANEL)
NEXT BUTTON
PB40 ( MAI N PANEL)
SPEED UP BUTTON
OS2-2 (CONNECTOR BOARD)
SPARE
LS64 (NON-OP-SIDE)
NO 1 FRONT COVER
SS4 (DELIVERY PANEL)
SPRAY SW
PB4 (NO I PANEL)
NO 1 UNIT ON-OFF BUTTON
PB24 (NO 2 PANEL)
NO 2 UNIT ON-OFF BUTTON
PB33 ( MAI N PANEL)
10' BUTTON
PB10 i MAl N PANEL)
START BUTTON
LS55 (NON-OP-SIDE)
NO 2 FRONT COVER
LS58 (OP-SIDE)
El0 2VERTICAL ADJUSTMEEIT SW
R22
R3
I GROUPI-4 I LED ON THE MAIN PANEL I
LS1 (NON-OP-SIDE)
NO 1 LEVER POSITION I
LS21 (NON-OP-SIDE)
NO 2 LEVER POSITION I
CS2 (NON-OP-SIDE)
DELIVERY DOWN SW
SS2 MANU (NO 1 PANEL)
NO 1 INK MANU
SS22 MANU( N0 2 PANEL)
NO 2 INK MANU
PB36 ( MAI N PANEL)
10.' BUTTON
PB39 ( MAI N PANEL)
7000 R P H BUTTON
OS2-1 (CONNECTOR BOARD)
BLANKET WASH
LS61 (NON-OP-SIDE)
NO 1 TOP COVER
LS63 ( OP-SIDE)
110 l VERTICAL ADJUSTMEPIT Si W
SPRAY. PUMP. BZ
GROUP5 1 ~OLENOI D AT OP-SIDE
PH4 (TRANSFER DRUM)
PHOTO SENSOR
PB3 (NO 1 PANEL)
NO I REVERSEINCHING BUTTON
PB23 (NO 2 PANEL)
NO2 REVERSEINCHING BUTTON
PB32 ( MAI N PANEL)
10' BUTTON
PB14 ( MAI N PANEL)
lOOOR P H BUTTON
LS54 (NON-OP-SIDE)
NO 2 TOP COVER
LS57 (OP-SIDE)
NO 2 SAFETY BAR
N0.2 INK STOP SOL.
NO.l LEVER FORWARD SOL. I GROUP6 I SOLENOID AT NON-OP-SIDE I
PB2 (NO 1 PANEL)
NO 1 NORMAL INCHING BUTTON
PB22 (NO 2 PANEL)
NO 2 NORMAL INCHING BUTTON
PB31 ( MAI N PANEL)
COUNT ON-OFF BUTTON
PB12 ( MAI N PANEL)
BLANKET WASH BUTTON
LS53 (NON-OP-SIDE)
NO 2 BACK COVER
R8
R28
I GROUP7 I INVERTER CONTROLLER I
PHI (FEEDER)
PHOTO SENSOR
PB1 (NO 1 PANEL)
NO 1 EMERGENCY STOP BUTTON
PB21 (NO 2 PANEL)
NO 2 EMERGEIICY STOP BUTTON
PB30 ( MAI N PANEL)
COUNT RESET BUTTON
PB11 (MAI N PANEL)
END CYCLE BUTTON
LS66 (FEEDER) (OPTION)
SUCTION SAFETY COVER
LS52 (DELIVERY)
DELIVERY COVER
PB50 (DELIVERY)
EMERGENCY STOP BUTTON
N0.1 WATER STOP SOL.
N0.2 WATER STOP SOL.
R23
R4
R24
I R5
I N0.l BLANKET WASH SOL. I R1 3 I DELAYED PAPER SOL. I
N0.2 LEVER FORWARD SOL.
NO.l LEVER RETURN SOL.
N0.2 LEVER RETURN SOL.
GROU p8
TAPE INSERTER.
LINE FOR INPUT MATRIX
SS5-SS8: LED LIGHTS AT OFF POSITION.
PHI-PH4: LED LIGHTS WHEN SOMETHING
IS ON THE SENSOR.
SAFETY SW. PB50. LS52-LS66 :
LED LIGHTS WHEN MACHINE
CAN RUN.
, ? . ,
R1 0
R1 1
R12
R25
R7
~ ~ \ ~ T E ~ o R w A R D
y$\yT\,TE,R,vERsE
DELIVERY DOWN SOL.
N0.2 BLANKET WASH SOL.
N0.l IMPRESSION SOL.
R1 5
R1 6
PUMP MOTOR
FEED OFF SOL.
SMALL OFFSET PRESS
ltek Graphix 3985
I PARTS LIST
H& L SECTION INDEX
r;; ,9 F % Bed section
* 4% 9 Main section
$% *I€ % Feeder section
4 7 k 3 Ink,water section
as
% % Electrical section
4 * n " , 3 Accessories sect ion
' >
! %?
3 Lubrication section
A/ <- %, +a>!& Cover section etc.
$. x->. 7")1il)-s Chain delivery section
%n " a S %%5 1 Part number index
PREFACE
Thank you for purchasing our small offset press.
Please use this parts list when ordering any parts or consulting
a service technician.
(Reference) For the "Ink, Water sectionN, the part quantities shown i n the parts list are
the numbersof the parts to be used on one printing unit.
So, the actual part quantities for one machine are twice the number shown.
6 cowrrnra
. . . ---
I:] .- -. -. .. .... . . . --- - -- --- --- -- --- - : . . =: - - -
---
-. .. - - -
--
.--
. .- ---
. .. ---
. . ---
.. . ---
.. - --- . - -
. . . . ---
. . . ---
- -
. . . . - - - --- . - -
. . . . . . . . - .
---
. . . . . . . . . . .- - - - - -
. . . . . . . . . . - - - - - -
.. . . . - .. - -
. . . . . . - .
. . . - . . .- . - -
. .. . .. . . . . -. -
. . .. . . . --
- . . - . - - - . - .
. - . . . - - - . - -
. . . . . . . - - - . - -
.. .
. . . . . . - - -- . - -
. . . . . - - . --
L m L 1 srcnow INDEX
.. . -. -----.-I
.... -- --I
' . ' . .--- --I
How to use the parts list
1. Section number
This parts l i st i s divided i nto machine sections and each section has a number
(Example) Section number
5340Z 230
--
The section number
The machine model number
* This number includes bqt h the machine model number and
the secti on number.
2. How to use the parts list
1) To fi nd the part nurnber(when ordering the part)
Part to replace
------+
Fi nd the section number needed
on thi s i l l ustrati on of the machine.
1 I
2) To fi nd the section number and the posi ti on i dentl fi cai ton number
of the part i n the i l l ustrati on when knowi ng the part number
To f i nd the section number and
the posi ti on i denti fi cati on number
use the part number index at the
end of thi s manual
i i l / CONTENTS
*953>%%
Section No .
+ 9 5 3 > % Section name
4-5
Page
a+ FSD
4 y F 7 b-&
$>YE@
a*%SD
% 1 annh
% 2 1RA;h
s a w
% 1 5.LBR
% 2 i.LBw
RBI
n
*%47 b-&
a g$E€S D
7 4 . FY-T-IL
EE%%€2
7 4 -9-7 b-&
4 - / P- 9 j . f F
Y 3 2 3 >BIB
7 4 - F u - 5 -
7 4 -8-s- F
4-/<-4 >*-2 3 >
7 4 -9- F5. L
7 4 . F=F-Y)LS$@
/ \ 4 I - ZI >I - ~. I L . 7 4 - F b / < -
Q4>+, 7kSD
4 >+7 b-A
4 >4=7 t >T>
ij-+l/-Y4 > y u - 5 -
4>+i j - +b- 74>9' u- 5-
7*- &U- 3-
%# b~2-
7h7*>=i >U- S-
7k7*- An- 7-
&nw
USWiSD
%I@* .Y 3 x
- Yi %I @$ ~ 9 x ( 1 1 jlt8@$[1
+fi %l @s. ~ 9 x ( 2 1 &l)14@43
Yl $l @$*~ 9 X ( 3 L%?&U9EJ$[1
a Bed section D
Bed frame ...................................................
pump piping ................................................
aMai n section [)
1st cylinder pressure .......................................
2nd cylinder pressure ....................................
Impression cylinder .......................................
1st blanket cylinder .......................................
2nd blanket cylinder .......................................
Drive .........................................................
Cam shaft ...................................................
Main frame ................................................
a Feeder section D
Feed table ..................................................
Multi-size paper pile board ................................
Feeder frame ................................................
Paper guide ................................................
Suction drive ................................................
Feed roller ...................................................
Feeder board ................................................
paper insertion .............................................
Feeder drum ................................................
paper feed table lifting ....................................
Height control bar . Feed lever ...........................
al nk, Water section D
Ink frame ...................................................
Ink fountain ................................................
Oscillating roller ..........................................
Ink oscillating roller .......................................
Form roller ...................................................
operation lever .............................................
Water fountain roller .......................................
Water form roller ..........................................
Plate cylinder ................................................
Q Electrical section [>
Control box ................................................
Sub control box (1) ..........................................
Sub control box (2) .......................................
Sub control box (3) .......................................
;R / CONTENTS
t 9 : / 3 > %3
Sectlon No .
Section name
.p . ?
Page
Q Accessories section D
QLubrication section D
~ ~ b ~ i ~ ~ t i ~ ~ ( 0 ~ s ) ......................................... 170
Lubrication (NOpS) ....................................... 174
QCover section. etc.D
Tape inserter ................................................ 178
Cover (OpS) .............................................. 180
Cover (NOpS) ................................................ 184
l st safety cove, ............................................. 188
2nd safety cover ..........................................
192
Safety bar ...................................................
196
l s t blanket cleaning ....................................... 200
2nd blanket cleaning ....................................... 204
Blanket cleaning drive .................................... 208
Powder spray unit .......................................... 212
~ ~ ~ i ~ t ~ ~ punch ............................................. 214
QChain delivery section D
Frame (CD) ...................................................
218
Drive . Driven shafts (CD) .................................
220
chain gripper (CD) ......................................... 224
paper delivery table (CD) .................................
226
stand lifting drive (CD) .................................... 230
si de guide (CD) ............................................. 234
Back guide (CD) ............................................. 238
apar t number index [)
? - Y P - / L / - L ,
BED F R A M E
75 -/ -/ 3 / SECTION NUMBER >34ut i ' I-IU 1
SECTION
. - . . - -
/ BED F R A M E
SECTION NUMBER
*ZnlB(dlrr&f L d S W L T 3 d+?A.ClT,
b # G T , %T L T T Br , ,
I I Note When ordermng mtem marked i .,nd,cate the set number because L e y ai r avaabl e only as a set
@kES% P A R T N A ME m a
COMPONENT PART; NO. a'ty
28 96051 <>1###BOT_TEXT###quot;-7- FR-ZI 20-1. 5K I N V E R T E R FR- Z1 20-1. 5K 1
29 5340 61 154 f >1\'-!9-h1###BOT_TEXT###quot;- INVERTER COVER 1
30 9670061 208 ~!~' !Jbih' lbb M6X12 SOCKET BOLT M6X12
31 9670061 608 Y!JYbt"Ibb M6X16 S OCK E T BOLT M6X16 4
33 966006001 4 f Y b M6 NUT M6 4
34 99953 772 F A N
35 971 0030008 t \ "3t "h"3 M3 S P R I N G WASHER M3 4
36 9642031 41 4 f 1\ \ 335" M3X14 SCREW M3X14 4
37 9710050008 11\34"h"3 M5 SPRING WASHER M5 2
38 5340 61 423 7" 559 b BRACKET 1
39 5340 31 113 7" 5 5 4 b BRACKET 1
P3' J hr bf 7"L3 F OR USArCANADA
-
39 5340 11 114 7"5!T1!J b BRACKET 1
b\ \ f' !J?5@"3333 W I T H GERMAN S A F E T Y FEATURES
40 95147 7"3537" SR-7W-2 BUSHING SR-7W-2 1
? %~J b , b f 9 " L3 F OR USArCANADA
40 98899
7 \ IJ 3 3 7 \
SR-6P3-5 BUSHING SR-6P3-5 1
i-' \-fY?>P"3533 WI T H GERMAN S A F E T Y FEATURES
41 9670051 008 Y9'Yi-ik'lbb M5X1 0 SOCKET BOLT M5X10 2
?SI Jb, bf S"L9 F OR USAyCANADA
42 99776 7fl b7- BKO-C1947H01 NOISE FI LTER BKO-C1947H01 1
43 964204201 4 f 1" 333" M4X20 SCREW M4X20 1
44 971 0040008 ~1' 3?f' b"3 M4 SPRING WASHER M4 1
45 966004001 4 f Y b M4 NUT M4 1
46 5340 76 001 $-IILI\ ~ S OI L PAN 2
d J I I ~ l J J d
P U M P P I P I N G
-- - ...-
SECTION NUMBER 1 J 3 ' t u ~ I I U I
SECTION
SECTION NUMBER 554UZ 170 1
20 5340 17 113 A T 0 - 7 - SPACER 2
21 5290 16 315 7 \ \ 3 WASHER 2
22 5290 16 313 7 TI b 9 - F I L T E R
-
1
23 91240 7 0 - ~ ‘ 1 ~ 7 ~ 1 b 3/4 N I P P L E 3/4 5
PUMP P I P I N G
24 91233 45 11bt' 3/4 ELBOW 3/4 1
25 5290 16 316 $3" SCREW 2
SECTION
*Za)S.".ltl&TldhhBLT'C d * Aa ) f . t / E %%f , f % L T T ~ L ~ ,
S P R I N G
Note When orderlng ]terns marked *,tnd~cate the set number because they are ava~l abl e only asa set
iz 1 k a!% Sn%S-% ME%%
PART NAME me2
NO SET NO / PART NO COMPONENT PARTS NO ~ ' t y
27 5290 16 312 I\O 9*3 P A C K I N G
28 96721 01 51 4 0 Yb 7 t ' l Cb M I 0x1 5 HEXAGON B OL T MIOX1 5 4
29 5290 16 215 t 0370 PUMP 1
30 91237 ~ 4 7 O I b 1/8 N I P P L E 1/8 1
31 91236 11biti' 1 /8 ELBOW 1/8 1
32 5290 16 41 1 1 \ 0 f 7 0 P I P E 1
- --
33 91241-1 V 3 Y b 1/8X1/4 SOCKET 1 /8X1/4 1
34 5290 16 41 5-2 1A" I b N OZ Z L E 1
35 91234 ~ I b i t i " 3/4 ELBOW 3/4 1
36 5290 16 212 *t7'!J70 CAP 2
37 91231 7

952 3/4X3/8 B U S H I N G 3/4X3/8 2
38 5340 17 123 * - A 9X15X580 HOSE 9x1 5x580 2
39 9410301608 X7O l Js7"t0s 3x1 6 S P R I N G P I N 3x16 2
40 5340 17 114 X t " 3 b \ \ l b S P I N D L E 1
41 5340 16 421 * - A I ~ X ~ ~ X I O O O HOSE 15X22X1000 1
42 964205507 4 f T \ \ 3 3 5 \ \ M5X50 SCREW M5X50 6
43 965005201 4 7 1 b 9 5 3 3 3 " M5X20 SCREW M5X20 2
44 5300 1 2 224 7 O b- b P L A T E 2
45 5300 17 117 97: ( ?+i b" l J- ) KNOB ( I V O R Y ) 2
45 5310 17 117 47, ( 70) KNOB ( B L A C K ) 2
46 5300 17 116 ?I)\\ - COVER 2
47 5290 17 1 1 5 X7O IJ 39" S P R I N G 2
48 5340 17 112 A t 0 3 b " l C S P I N D L E 1
49 91212 t - A 1 \ " 3 b' 2 5 HOSE CLAMP 2 5 2
50 5290 17 1 1 1 11" lC7" V A L V E 1
51 5290 17 119 7537O CLAMP 3
52 91251 799T- Z- f l bb97° 6 O I L CUP 6 1
53 5290 16 412-1 S f 7 7 ° CAP 1
54 90502 O- l J 3 7 " P - 4 6 O- R I N G P - 4 6 1
55 91150 T- l b WI CK 1
56 5290 16 414 8 " b lb B OT T L E 1
57 5290 16 413 f 3 b NUT 1
14
58 5 3 4 0 1 6 4 2 3 t - X 1 0 X 1 7 X 8 0 0 HOSE 10x1 7 x 8 0 0 1
m- ;1J' J\ < n3
- -
5 9 9 1 2 3 2 T?l
71ll~iti" 3 / 4 ELBOW 3 / 4 1
0 9 1 2 0 0 t - X ~ Y 7 ~ l b P T 3 / 4 HOSE N I P P L E P T 3 / 4 1
- .
t7>3'/
6 1 5 2 9 0 16 2 2 6 70 - 1 ) - P UL L E Y 1
6 2 9 6 7 0 0 8 1 6 0 8 Y?! ! Jbt \ \ I l Jb M8 X 1 6 SOCKET B OL T M 8 X 1 6 1
SECTION NUMBER 5 3 4 0 2 1 7 0 1
6 3 5 3 4 0 1 7 1 2 5 t - A 9 X 1 5 X 3 7 0 HOSE 9x1 5 x 3 7 0
PUMP P I P I N G
HOSE 10x1 7x1 000
SECTION
* ZO' ) I BLt l &f I ZBS LL. 3 B d h mf . t . 2 ESeTIP2 L T T $ c ~ ,
Note: When ordering items marked *,indicate the set number because they are available only as a set.
t~ b #5/ I o". B5 .MSS9
PART NAME
r n I
SET NO. PART NO. ~~". G%/ COMPONENT PARTS NO. ~ ' t y
P l l I / I W
1 S T C Y L I N D E R PRESSURE
-. - 4-
SECTION NUMBER I
> - ) - t UL C IV
SECTION
3 1 9 4 1 0 5 0 2 0 0 8 A7O 1J29"t 02 5 x 2 0 SPRING P I N 5 x 2 0 4
32 9 7 2 1 1 2 0 0 0 8 E-IJST" E- 12 E-RI NG E- 12 2
3 3 5340 21 1 7 3 7-6 A R M 1
2 I I I / I U
1ST CYLINDER PRESSURE
3 4 5340 21 1 7 2 to 2 PI N 1
L, M =-
SECTION NUMBER
J3' t U. L L I U I
SECTION
* ; a ) l G P . L t W G T L d S B L T B d ~ h ~ T . t./ t %+T,~%LTTcL.,
3 5 5290 33 451- 1 X7°1J39'\ SPRING 2
3 6 5290 21 1 6 1 X7O 1JS7"b? SPRING STUD 2
Note When orderlng Items marked *,lnd~cate the set number because they are available only as a set
- t ? Yk * + =' B a$%- mas*
S E T N o N o
P A R T NAME fii?%
COMPONENT PARTS' NO ~ ' t y
2 1 9 6 8 4 0 5 0 5 0 8 b%;i(3\ M5X5 SET SCREW M5X5 1 0
22 5330 52 492 b%b5- LOCK COLLAR 4
23 9 7 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 8 E-IJS7" E- 10 E-RI NG E- 10
2 4 5340 21 1 2 0 ~ L L / ! \ " - C A M LEVER
I
1
I
2 5 9670062 5 0 8 Y59kt"Ibk M6X25 SOCKET BOLT M6X25 2
2 6 5340 21 1 7 4 7"55Y b BRACKET 1
A- 27 5 3 4 0 21 1 3 2 to 2 PI N 2
2 8 5290 21 6 1 2 $91) BUSHING 2
2 9 9 6 7 0 0 5 2 0 0 8 Y3Ybt"Ibb M5X20 SOCKET BOLT M5X20 6
3 0 5340 21 1 1 2 A93 b'\ STUD 1
37 5340 21 1 7 1 X9Y b\ \ STUD 1
3 8 971 0 1 20008 I\\ 34\ b\ 3 M 1 2 SPRING WASHER MI 2 2
3 9 96601 2001 4 f Y b MI 2 NUT MI 2 2
4 0 5300 5 9 565 X7O 1137" S P R I N G 1
41 5290 41 1 1 4- 1 A7OIJ37\b3 SPRING STUD 1
42 972 1 0 4 0 0 0 8 E-'127" E- 4 E-RI NG E- 4 6
43 5300 5 6 0 8 8 X7O IJ37" SPRING 4
4 4 5340 21 1 1 1 'J27 L I NK 1
45 5310 52 2 9 3 $\A BOSS 1
46 9721 0 7 0 0 0 8 E-IJS7" E- 7 E-RI NG E- 7 1 1
47 5340 21 2 1 0 '137 L I NK 1
4 8 9 0 6 2 8 Xf'J7O t 0 2 SSP-4 SNAP P I N SSP-4 2
49 5300 33 561- 1 t o> PI N 1
5 0 5300 3 3 562 b5- COLLAR 2
52 5340 21 1 3 3 IJ27di"iS BOSS 2
5 3 5310 52 2 9 2 129Y STUD 1
5 4 5340 21 1 4 4 I127fi
A BOSS 1
55 5340 21 1 4 5 '127 LI NK 1
5 6 9670041 2 0 8 Y5Y t - t " l bb M4X12 SOCKET BOLT M4X12 4
5 7 97632 YbJf b" AS- 05N A C I 15V SOLENOID AS- 05N AC115V 1
5 8 5330 57 1 5 1 7"5!7'!J BRACKET
4
5 9 966004001 4 f Y b M4 NUT M4 4
6 0 9670061 2 0 8 Y?'Ybt'lbb M6X12 SOCKET BOLT M6X12 8
61 5340 21 154 I157 LI NK 3
62 90692 451###BOT_TEXT###quot;5 L1 0 SPRING L10 4
,- , , I / t W
i 3 5340 21 152 to;, - PI N 2
64 9670103008 ./!J'Ybik\ll/i- M I OX30 SOCKET BOLT MIOX30 1
65 5340 21 160 b" 9f l r P- L A R M 1
. . .
- c7- 73/
66 9670061 008 ./9'Ybt'Ibb M6X1 0 SOCKET BOLT M6X10 2
- -
THRUSTER COVER
SECTION NUMBER 53402 210 1
-
68 5290 29 412 b L 0 - 5 - f f1J3 C A M ROLLER WASHER 4
69 5340 21 148 '137 LI NK - 1
1 S T CYLINDER PRESSURE
70 5340 21 151 '137 LI NK 3
SECTION
* Z ~ E B Z L L S Z ~ ( ~ S : B L L ~ ~d-tfmt. t.7 b%%c*x LTT+ L.,
71 9670065508 J!J3i-t'Ibb M6X55 SOCKET BOLT M6X55 2
72 5340 21 147 b\ \ 9f bbl \ \ \ - At - ' ! ) 1\ ~ - STOPPER 1
Note: When ordering items marked*,indicate the set number because they are available only as a set.
t7t%% dB at 3
SET No. /E&T No.
tffii'i%% PART NAME fa%
~ ~ ~ ~ * I c o M P o N E N T PARTS No. Q' t y
- - -
THRUSTER
74 5340 21 520 bLL/I###BOT_TEXT###quot;- C A M LEVER 1
75 5340 21 140 k?\Ib b/ \ \ \ - LEVER 1
76 5340 21 511 ASY kt \ STUD 1
77 5340 21 146 3 bt!'/\O - STOPPER 1
78 5290 26 112 $918 BUSHING
79 9670063508 ./!TY bt "i 8b M6X35 SOCKET BOLT M6X35 4
30 5330 21 664 AbYl ###BOT_TEXT###quot;- STOPPER 1
81 5340 21 134- 1 7i5' jb" STUD 1
82 97 101 00008 i \ ' \ 34\ \ f i "3 MI 0 SPRING WASHER MI 0 4
83 96601 0001 4 ftYb MI 0 NUT MI 0 4
84 5290 52 244 A7O lJ39\ b!T S P R I N G ST UD 2
85 9670061 608 'I!TYi-%\ILrb M6X16 SOCKET BOLT M6X16 2
86 5330 21 662 h/ \ " - COVER 1
87 5340 21 550- 1 i-7"Ibbl###BOT_TEXT###quot;- LEVER 1
88 5340 21 562- 2 ASYb" STUD 1
89 5340 21 563 A kt!'/\o - STOPPER 1
90 5340 21 820- 1 f %- 3\ \ bLl ~I \ \ \ - LEVER 1
91 5340 21 842 A97 l.\ STUD 1
92 5340 21 564 lJ27 LI NK 1
94 5340 21 580 t - ' \ 3f b 7- L (OPS) A R M (OPS) 1
95 941 1503600 f -11"-t 03 5x36 TAPER PI N 5x36 2
97 5290 54 325 A7O '137" SPRING 1
98 5340 21 830- 1 lJ57 LI NK 1
10 5340 21 850- 1 IJ27 A R M 1
101 5340 21 841 A97 b\ ST UD 1
102 5340 21 561 to 2 PI N 1
1Q3 5340 21 572 ?'\?1J37\%Y1 BE ARI NG COVER 2
104 9031 9 ~"-lC?"?lJ37" 620322 BAL L BE ARI NG 620322 2
Y \ \ ~ I r - 7 - l ~
1 S T CY L I NDE R PRESSURE
105 5340 21 571 3\ 7 SHAFT 1 a
106 5340 21 590 b"3fb 7- L ( NOPS) ARM ( NOPS) 1
107 5290 33 454 X7O lJ37"X54 b" S P RI NG STUD 1
x7-73y
SECTION NUMBER I
> 3 4 U L L ' I U I
SECTION
* z ~ I & I ~ ~ ~ % T U G ~ L T ~ bt?AOlT, -tr ) ~ % % T ; ~ T L T T B L , ~
Note When order~ng Items marked *,tndlcate the set number because they are avatlable only as a set
108 5290 21 142 X7O fJ37
A97b
S P RI NG STUD 1
109 5340 21 610 7- 6 ARM 1
110 5340 2 1 621 X 9 ' ! J b '\ STUD 1
-k bS% QE at%
S E T NO /;?RT NO %m%%;#h/
m%#% PART NAME la%
COMPONENT PARTS NO. Q' t y
111 5340 21 633 X 3 -1b SCALE 1
112 5340 21 640 7Ob-b P L AT E 1
BRACKET
114 5340 21 631-1 SP7b SHAFT 1
11 5 941 0303008 A 7 O IJ37"t03 3x30 S P R I N G P I N 3x30 1
116 5340 21 632-1 bL CAM 1
117 5300 54 152 %9 I C BUS HI NG 1
1 1 8 5290 37 123 ' $SIC BUS HI NG 1
119 5340 21 220 P - L ARM 1
120 5340 21 891 bn"- COVER 1
122 9716040014 t7V"fi"3 M4 P L A I N WASHER M4 2
5" f Z k' 3f b
2 ND C Y L I N D E R PRESSURE
-7-~~37 SECTION NUMBER I 5 3 4 0 2 220 1
SECTION
- < - - - - >
SECTION NUMBER I 53402 2 2 0 1
2 N D CYLINDER PRESSURE SECTION
It~OlE!3.",lb$r.P.Tlb6j,k?LT~ d +? k a ) T. * bS%T',iX L T T PL . .
Note When ordering ~t ems marked*,lndlcate the set number because they are ava~lable only as a set
NO t7 b%e 3 at4
SET No. /b;;"RT No
11%%
PART NAME l?a%
COMPONENT PARTS NO ~ ' t y
22 5340 2 1 622 7' 534 b BRACKET 1
23 9670063508 Y3'YPt'lbb M6X35 SOCKET BOLT M6X35 4
24 5 3 4 0 21 183 7314b RATCHET 2
2 5 9 4 1 0301 608 A7O ~JS7' t 0> 3 x 1 6 SPRING PI N 3 x 1 6 3
2 6 5 3 4 0 21 631- 1 SP7b SHAFT 1
27 5 3 4 0 21 632- 1 b L C A M 1
2 8 9 4 1 1503600 T- t \ " - t o > 5 x 3 6 TAPER PI N 5 x 3 6 2
2 9 9670061 208 Y!~'!Jkdi\lbb M6X12 SOCKET BOLT M6X12 8
3 0 5 3 4 0 2 1 572 1 " 7 1 ~ S 7 " ~ Y ~ BEARING COVER 2
31 90319 ili\-Jl11\?'JS7" 620322 BALL BEARING 620322 2
32 5340 21 771
5 \ 7
SHAFT 1
3 3 9 4 1 0303008 7i7O lJ37" t o> 3 x 3 0 SPRING PI N 3 x 3 0 1
3 5 5340 2 1 154 IJ27 LI NK 3
3 6 9721100008 E-IJ37" E- 10 E-RING E- 10 5
37 9410301 208 7i7O 'J>7\ ~ O S 3 x 1 2 SPRING PI N 3 x 1 2 5
3 8 5 3 4 0 21 780 7-6 A R M 1
3 9 5 3 4 0 21 561 to 2 PI N 1
40 5340 21 148 'J 3 7 L I NK 1
41 9670103008 Y3Y kt \ \ I bk M I OX30 SOCKET BOLT MI OX30 1
42 5 3 4 0 21 740 7-L A R M 1
43 5340 2 1 830- 1 l J57 LI NK 1
44 5 3 4 0 21 860- 1 bt###BOT_TEXT###quot;- LEVER 1
45 5340 21 871 A9Y k\ STUD 1
4 6 5 3 4 0 2 1 191 A 9 - l b SCALE 1
47 5 2 9 0 22 318 2 3 \ SCREW 1
48 5300 22 317 7Ob- b PLATE 1
49 5 3 0 0 22 313 7
<Plb ( ?f $' \ r J- ) DI AL ( I VORY) 1
49 5 3 1 0 22 313 9" f Pl b (70) DI AL (BLACK) 1
50 5340 21 182 b L C A M 1
51 9 4 1 0302008 A7O ' J37" t 03 3 x 2 0 SPRING PI N 3 x 2 0 1
52 5340 21 181 3 - 7 SHAFT 1
53 941 0302508 A7°' J37" t 02 3 x 2 5 SPRING PI N 3 x 2 5 1
5 4 9670062508 Y3' Ybt' l bb M6X25 SOCKET BOLT M6X25 2
55 5340 2 1 1 7 4 7"53' Yb BRACKET 1
56 5 3 4 0 21 172 t O S PI N 1
A R M
58 9684040408 b$;(5' M4X4 SET SCREW M4X4 1
59 5321 22 121 f " I b b BOLT 2
6 0 5340 21 171 7i 7 'Y b \ STUD 1
. . . . - . - .
SECTION NUMBER 5340z 220 1
61 5300 59 565 X7O 9 5 7 " SPRING L
2ND CYLINDER PRESSURE
62 5290 52 244 X7O fJS7"bti SPRING STUD
SECTION
s z n s s ~t r i i z ~~d . ~~ LTI d.trnm-r-. e . 7 E #%Ti82 L-cre I.,
--
3 5290 54 325 X7O 1157'' SPRING I
64 9721040008 E-1137" E-4 E-RING E-4 6
Note: When ordering items marked* ,indicate the set number because they are available only as a set.
t ~ h # 8 3"#8 MS.%% PART NAME ma
SET NO. / ~ZT NO. ~ P ~ ~ / C O M P O N E N T PARTS NO. Q ' ~ Y
65 5330 21 664 A bYl \ O - STOPPER 1
66 5340 21 880- 1 7- L A RM 1
67 5340 21 841 A 9 9 b\ STUD 1
68 971 01 00008 l \ ' 34" b' 3 M I 0 SPRING WASHER MI 0 3
69 96601 0001 4 $'Yb MI 0 NUT MI 0 3
70 9670062008 Y9' Ybt ' l Lb M6X20 SOCKET BOLT M6X20 2
71 5340 21 143 S f Pb/ \ ' - THRUSTER COVER 1
- - - - - - pp
C A M ROLLER WASHER
73 9410502008 37" lJ27'to> 5x 20 SPRING PI N 5x20 4
74 5290 37 433 A 7 O 1137' b3 SPRING STUD 1
75 5290 21 161 3 7 O ' 157\ ' b! ~ SPRING STUD
76 5340 21 730 bl \ " - LEVER 1
77 5290 26 112 %9l L BUSHING 2
78 9670065508 ~ ~ ' Y b $ \ \ l L b M6X55 SOCKET BOLT M6X55 2
79 5340 21 147 k \ \ 9 f b b / \ \ ' - A b ' Y ~ \ ~ - STOPPER 1
' 0 5340 21 134- 1 A 9 4 b " STUD 1
81 9670061 608 ./?Yb&' l Cb M6X16 SOCKET BOLT M6X16 2
82 5330 21 662 h l \ \ \ - COVER 1
83 5340 21 563 7i blY/\O - STOPPER 1
84 5340 21 144 1137t " X BOSS 1
85 5340 21 145 '1 57 LI NK 1
86 5330 52 492 b Z h 5 - LOCK COLLAR 4
87 5300 56 088 A7O 1157" SPRING 4
88 5340 21 562- 2 A 9 4 b " S T U D 1
89 5340 21 760- 1 IJI\\- LEVER 1
90 5340 21 133 l J57i h' \ X BOSS 2
91 5340 21 590 b" 3- f b 7-L (NOPS) A RM (NOPS) 1
92 5340 21 146 Xb Yl \ O- STOPPER 1
PI N
94 5340 21 530 b L l r l \ " - C A M LEVER 1
95 5290 21 612 % 9 IL BUSHING 2
96 9670051 608 Y 3 Y b t " l t b M5X16 SOCKET BOLT M5X16 3
7 5340 21 751 X 3 ' Y b
STUD 1
9 8 5340 21 131 Y S P THRUSTER 1
99 5340 21 520 b L b / \ \ ' - C A M LEVER 1
SECTION NUMBER I
3 5 4 UZ 220 1
100 9670052008 Y54bt"Ibb M5X20 SOCKET BOLT M5X20 3
2ND CYLINDER P R E S S U R E
101 5340 21 112 A 9 'Y b '\ S T UD 1
102 5290 41 114- 1 A7O' )>7\h5 SPRING STUD
/
SECTION
~ X OS B MC B T ~ ~ S Z LTS e er-m-r. - t r . ~ I. #%T;*P L T r *
103 9670041 008 Y5'Ybt"ILb M4X10 SOCKET BOLT M4X10 4
Note: When ordering ~l ems marked * ,indicate the set number because they are available only as a set.
NO. t ,r b #t '3 #8 t]4.@#%
SET NO. /;?RT NO.
PART NAME @mi
COMPONENT PARTS NO. Q ' ~ V
104 97632 Jb/$b' \ AS-05N AC115V SOLENOID AS-05N AC115V 1
105 90628 Af'Y7O t o> SSP-4 SNAP PI N SSP-4 2
106 5300 33 562 bs- COLLAR 2
107 5340 21 721 3*P IJS9 THRUSTER LI NK 1
108 5300 33 561- 1 to> PI N 1
109 5340 21 210 1157 LI NK 1
110 5340 21 540 Y$P THRUSTER 1
11 1 966004001 4 f ' Y b M4 NUT M4 4
112 5330 57 151 7"5!74 BRACKET 1
113 5310 52 293 t\ A BOSS 1
114 5340 21 710 !lbl< b\ \ ?- L SOLENOID A R M 1
115 5310 52 292 A54b" STUD 1
116 5290 37 123 % 71L BUSHING 1
117 5300 54 152 $71b BUSHING 1
J J 1. .J
I M P R E S S I O N C Y L I N D E R
L, M z.
SECTION
SECTION NUMBER I
73LtU.L L 3 U I
- - - - - -,
J / I -t?7-232 SECTION NUMBER
1 5 3 4 0 2 2 3 0
I MP R E S S I ON CY L I NDE R SECTION
t~a>%.".Ld%n%T'Ld$3xb[T'f C*&a>T'. t . 7 ks%T%: l f t LTT$~\ ,
Note: When ordering ilems marked *,indicate the set number because they are available only as a set.
t ,r EI B t%
sn%%*/F,",",$NENT Pnws N o .
PART NAME
m a
SET No . /;FRT N o . Q' t y
5 3 4 0 2 3 1 1 0 - 2 PYb ' 3 ASSY I MP R E S S I O N C Y L I N D E R A S S Y . 1
5 3 4 0 2 3 1 1 0 2 - 2 P' Yb' 3 ASSY I MP R E S S I O N C Y L I N D E R ASSY
5 3 4 0 2 3 2 1 0 3 P 7 b ASSY S HA F T A S S Y 2
2 8 / 3 2 / 3 3
- -
5 3 4 0 2 3 2 3 1 2 2 7 O 1 J ~ 7 \ ' h \ \ ~ t - " S P R I N G G U I D E 2
3 0 / 3 1
5 3 4 0 2 3 2 3 2 2 7\097 B L OCK 2
-
3 8 / 3 9
5 3 4 0 2 3 2 3 4 2 7 " 5 5 9 b BRACKET 4
1 9 6 4 8 0 3 0 6 1 4 Y?J35" M 3 X 6 SCREW M 3 X 6 12
2 5 3 4 0 2 3 2 4 0 P Y t -' 34% GRI P P E R 12
3 5 4 8 0 23 2 2 1 $l b9\ \ - HOLDER 1 2
4 9 0 6 9 9 U f Y b M5 U- NUT M5 1 2
5 9 1 6 3 1 1\ \ 71139\ \ H K I 5 1 6 L L B E A R I N G H K 1 5 1 6 L L
6 9 1 6 3 0 A?' - 4- I R 1 2 X 1 5 X 1 6 . 5 SPACER I R 1 2 X 1 5 X l 6 . 5 8
7 5 2 9 0 2 9 311 tf ' b '\ 3 WASHER 4
8 5 3 4 0 2 3 237 7, hYl \ O - STOPPER 4
9 9 6 7 0 0 6 1 6 0 8 Y 9 Y b t " l b b M 6 X 1 6 SOCKET B OL T M 6 X 1 6 1 5
10 5 4 8 0 2 3 2 2 2 t 0 3 P I N 12
1 1 5 4 8 0 2 3 2 2 3 A'7O 1155'" S P R I N G 1 2
1 2 941 0 5 0 1 2 0 8 7i7°1J27"t02 5 x 1 2 S P R I N G P I N 5 x 1 2 1 2
1 3 90179 ~ Y B 7 ? f Y + b 3 3 3 " M5 X 8 SET SCREW M5 X 8 1 2
1 4 9 6 7 0 0 5 1 608 Y94b4i " l bt - M 5 X 1 6 SOCKET B O L T M 5 X 1 6 1 4
1 5 5 4 8 0 2 3 2 2 4 - 1 t l b9' - HOLDER 1 2
16 5 3 4 0 2 3 2 3 4 7 ' 5 5 Y h BRACKET 4
- - -
SOCKET B O L T M 6 X 2 0
1 8 9 6 4 8 0 4 0 6 1 4 953$5" M 4 X 6 SCREW M 4 X 6 8
19 5 3 4 0 7 5 811 ?\ 1 ~ ~ 1 1 0 - h i \ \ \ - COVER 2
2 0 5 2 9 0 2 4 1 2 7 4i "l bb B OL T 8
2 1 5 3 3 0 2 3 1 1 3 9 " b " 3 WASHER 8
2 2 5 3 4 0 2 3 1 1 2 +\'I'm GEAR 1
2 3 5 3 4 0 2 3 1 1 1 - 2 P Y k " 3 I MP R E S S I O N C Y L I N D E R 1
2 5 5 3 4 0 2 3 2 3 6 7'11- b P L A T E 4
6 9 6 6 0 0 8 0 0 1 4 f ' Yb M8 NUT M8 1
2 7 9 6 8 6 0 8 2 5 0 8 b %3 3 ' M8 X 2 5 SET SCREW M8 X 2 5 1
2 8 5 3 4 0 2 3 2 1 1 S P 7 I. SHAF T 2
SECTION NUMBER 53402 2 3 0 1
IMPRESSION CYLINDER SECTION
*zmOBS:. (dI. ". tlz61LT3 P d i i h ~ , t . 7 t #8Ti %XL- c7: e~~.
Note: When ordering items marked *,indicate the set number because they are available only as a set.
+ . 7 b f % ng %3
~ ~ ~ ~ / ? f , " , Z N E N T PARTS No. PART NAME
ma
SET No. /gFLr No. ~ ' t y
2 9 9721 0 7 0 0 0 8 E-'137'' E- 7 E-RING E- 7 2
3 0 5300 45 243 3711, BUSHING 2
3 1 5340 23 2 3 1 A7" ' J37"b' f b" SPRING GUIDE 2 .
32 941 1 5 0 2 5 0 0 7 - J l O- t " 2 5 x 2 5 TAPER P I N 5 x 2 5 2
3 3 5340 23 2 2 0 7"t JY1\ 0-P-L ASSY GRIPPER A R M ASSY 7
3 4 5290 29 412 LO-5-f f1J3 CAM ROLLER WASHER 2
3 5 5290 29 411 LO-7- C A M ROLLER 2
3 6 5340 23 2 1 2 to 2 P I N 2
3 7 5340 23 233 A7O '137" SPRING 2
3 8 5340 23 232 7" 077 BLOCK 2
3 9 90441 7" Y32 0 8 1 2 BUSHING 0 8 1 2 2
4 0 966006001 4 f Y b M6 NUT M6 2
41 971 0 0 6 0 0 0 8 1
3f ' h"3 M6 SPRING WASHER M6 2
42 9 6 7 0 0 6 4 5 0 8 J 5 9 b4i"lbb M6X45 SOCKET BOLT M6X45 3
4 3 5340 23 1 3 6 12 b" 7Ob- b PLATE 1
4 4 5340 23 1 3 3 b L C A M 1
45 5340 23 1 3 2 i(1°- 9 - SPACER 2
4 6 5340 23 1 3 4 h L CAM 1
4 7 5340 23 1 3 5 b L C A M 1
4 8 5340 23 1 3 1 t\ BOSS 1 '
4 9 5340 23 1 1 4 5?7 b SHAFT 1
5 0 9 6 7 0 0 6 8 0 0 8 Y59bt \ \ l bb M6X80 SOCKET BOLT M6X80 2
5 1 5 3 4 0 23 1 1 5 PYb\3$71L BUSHING 1
-
52 91621 t \ \ - l bI " ?~J S9" 6207ZZCM BALL BEARING 6207ZZCM 2
53 5340 23 1 1 8 ~ Y ~ " ~ ? " P I J S ~ \ \ B J \ \ \ - BEARING COVER 2
5 4 9670051001 Y33bt " l bb M5X10 SOCKET BOLT M5X10 6
5 6 5340 23 1 1 6- 1 P' ! Jb\ \ 3Yb%l l b (NOPS) BUSHING (NOPS) 1
5 7 971 6 0 6 0 0 1 4 t 5 7 \ \ b " 2 M6 PL AI N WASHER M6 6
5 8 5340 23 1 1 7 2711, BUSHING 1
5 9 5 3 4 0 23 3 1 1 P'Y b" 3bL CAM 1
6 0 5340 23 312 A?" - 7- SPACER 2
6 1 5 3 4 0 23 238 AJ' Y7" LJ-bSL SPACER 8
6 2 90181 0Yb7Pf ' ! J+Y5333\ ' M4X8 SCREW M4X8 8
6 3 5 3 4 0 23 113- 1 SP7b SHAFT 1
6 4 9 6 7 0 0 6 3 5 0 8 ~YYbdi ' l bb M6X35 SOCKET BOLT M6X35 4
. . , - .... <
1 S T B L A N K E T C Y L I N D E R
SECTION NUMBER I
2 - r - t V L CL t U
I SECTION
- r r d - p l - J
SECTION NUMBER
5322 24 230 9537' ASSY CLAMP ASSY 1
100- 1 0 3
53402 240
1ST BLANKET CYLINDER
5340 24 220 9- f 37~4b7\ \ 5533bt l b9\ ' - QUICK S E T BLANKET HOLDER A S S Y 1
SECTION
*zoBnSluis,-rubj;ffLTe deno-r. t . 7 E# + T i l %L T T t L . .
5340 24 550 <23\ \ 3- 9- 3P7b ASSY INDICATOR SHAFT A S S Y 1
Note: When ordering items marked *,indicate the set number because they are available only as a set.
*.YE*% dS
188%/ +$ J MS8 PART NAME me2
SET NO. / b f RT NO. COMPONENT PARTS NO. Q' t y
4 5 / 4 6 / 5 0
5340 75 820- 1 b11"- A S S Y COVER A S S Y 1
54, 104-111
1 5290 24 253 TYb NUT 1
2 5340 24 213 blJ'Y!Jhf 7' BRACKET 2
3 5310 24 211 3 P7 I. SHAFT 2
4 5430 24 125 t 3 t. NUT 4
5 5430 24 124- 1 iti"1bb BOLT 4
6 9670063508 Y!J'Ykiti'lbb M6X35 SOCKET BOLT M6X35 4
7 9684060608 b%39' M6X6 SET SCREW M6X6 9
8 5341 24 214 7'39Yb BRACKET 2
9 5340 24 215 b f 7' B RACKET 4
1 0 9670051 001 Y34kih'lbk M5X10 SOCKET BOLT M5X10 1 6
1 1 5320 24 240 Y?: KNOB 1
)2 5290 24 251 A7' tJ27
SPRING 3
1 3 5290 29 313 +J \ \ *
WASHER 2
1 4 971 0040008 1